O9100 V28 M

Loop-O9100 ADM/TM Users Manual
LOOP TELECOMMUNICATION INTERNATIONAL, INC. 8F, NO. 8, HSIN ANN RD. SCIENCE-BASED INDUSTRIAL PARK HSINCHU, TAIWAN Tel: +886-3-578-7696 Fax: +886-3-564-6272
Note: Items in blue font (electronic file) represent changes from the previous version of this manual.
2008 Loop Telecommunication International, Inc. All rights reserved.

Version 28 09 SEP 2008 Loop-O is a trade mark of Loop Telecommunication International, Inc.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION................................................................................................1 1.1 Function Description .................................................................................................1 1.2 Application.................................................................................................................2 1.3 Loop-O9100 Topology and Protection Types ...........................................................7 1.3.1 Overview ...............................................................................................................7 1.3.2 Configuration 1: Linear Topology without Protection............................................7 1.3.3 Configuration 2: Linear Topology With MSP (1+1) Protection..............................8 1.3.4 Configuration 3: Ring Topology with SNCP/UPSR Protection .............................9 1.3.5 Configuration 4: Ring Topology Without Protection............................................10 1.3.6 Configuration 5: Ring Topology With and Without Protection ............................11 1.3.7 Configuration 6: Ring Topology with both MSP (1+1) and SNCP/UPSR Protection............................................................................................................12 1.3.8 Configuration 7: Dual-Homing ADM with Dual Tributary Lines at both Central Site and Remote Site ..........................................................................................13 1.3.9 Configuration 8: Dual-Homing ADM Protection with Dual Tributary Lines at the Central Site and A Single Tributary Line at the Remote Site .............................14 1.4 Specifications ..........................................................................................................15 INSTALLATION ...............................................................................................................18 2.1 Site Selection ..........................................................................................................18 2.2 Mechanical Installation ............................................................................................19 OPERATION....................................................................................................................32 3.1 Quick Start for Loop-O9100 ....................................................................................32 3.1.1 Power On ............................................................................................................32 3.1.2 Load Default........................................................................................................32 3.2 Logon, Logoff, and Password .................................................................................32 3.3 Return to Default .....................................................................................................33 3.4 Review of Default Configuration..............................................................................33 3.5 System Configuration ..............................................................................................33 3.5.1 Console Port .......................................................................................................33 3.6 Alarm .......................................................................................................................34 3.6.1 Alarm Filter Setup ...............................................................................................35 3.7 Performance Reports (per G.826)...........................................................................35 3.8 TSA (Time Slot Assignment) Type..........................................................................33 3.9 Expended TU11 numbering for O9100 ...................................................................34 3.10 Expended TU12 numbering for O9100 ...................................................................41 3.11 LED .........................................................................................................................43 3.12 SDH Multiplexing Structure (per G.707)..................................................................45 3.13 New SONET/SDH at the edge ................................................................................45 3.13.1 GFP (Generic Framing Procedure G.7041) ...................................................46 3.13.2 VC (Virtual Concatenation).............................................................................50 3.13.3 LCAS (Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme)....................................................50 3.14 Overview of GARP (Generic Attribute Registration Protocol) ................................52 3.15 Overview of GVRP (Generic VLAN Attribute Registration Protocol) .....................54 3.16 GARP Timers ..........................................................................................................55 3.16.1 Join Time ........................................................................................................55 3.16.2 Leave Time.....................................................................................................55 3.16.3 LeaveAll Time.................................................................................................56 3.16.4 Relationships Between Timers .......................................................................56 3.17 Spanning Tree (STP/ RSTP) Setup ........................................................................56 3.18 System Timing Sources ..........................................................................................57 MAINTENANCE...............................................................................................................64 4.1 Self-Test ..................................................................................................................64
4.2 Diagnostics..............................................................................................................64 4.3 Near End Loopback ................................................................................................64 4.3.1 Optical Line Loopback ........................................................................................64 4.3.2 Optical Local Loopback.......................................................................................64 4.3.3 Optical Payload Loopback ..................................................................................64 4.3.4 E1/T1 Line Loopback ..........................................................................................64 4.3.5 E1/T1 Local Loopback ........................................................................................65 5 6 FRONT PANEL OPERATION..........................................................................................66 TERMINAL OPERATION.................................................................................................67 6.1 Configuratin Display ................................................................................................68 6.1.1 System Configuration Display.............................................................................69 6.1.2 Timing Source Display ........................................................................................69 6.1.3 MISC. STM-1 Configuration Display...................................................................70 6.1.4 System Mode Display .........................................................................................71 6.1.5 Protection Display ...............................................................................................71 6.1.6 Bridge Information Display..................................................................................72 6.2 TSA Setting Display ................................................................................................72 6.3 Alarm History...........................................................................................................73 6.4 Current Alarm Status...............................................................................................74 6.5 System Information .................................................................................................74 6.6 STM-1 Performance................................................................................................75 6.6.1 1-Hour Performance Report ...............................................................................75 6.6.2 24-Hour Performance Report .............................................................................77 6.6.3 7-Day Performance Report .................................................................................78 6.7 Configuration Setup ................................................................................................80 6.7.1 System Configuration..........................................................................................81 6.7.2 Timing Source.....................................................................................................81 6.7.3 MISC. STM-1 Config...........................................................................................83 6.7.4 System Mode ......................................................................................................83 6.7.5 Protection Setup .................................................................................................84 6.7.6 MSP User Command ..........................................................................................85 6.7.7 Password Setup..................................................................................................86 6.7.8 Bridge Info Setup ................................................................................................86 6.7.9 Customer information Setup ...............................................................................87 6.7.10 APSD (Automatic Power Shutdown) Setup....................................................87 6.7.11 Lower Order Path AIS ....................................................................................88 6.7.12 Gateway Network Element Setup ..................................................................88 6.7.13 DHCP Setup ...................................................................................................67 6.7.14 Lower Order Mapping Mode...........................................................................67 6.7.15 Ring Closure ...................................................................................................67 6.7.16 Payload Type for Retiming .............................................................................67 6.7.17 HDLC Bandwidth Setup..................................................................................68 6.8 TSA Config ..............................................................................................................68 6.8.1 TSA Map Change ...............................................................................................69 6.8.2 TSA Delete (removed units) ...............................................................................69 6.8.3 TSA Map Delete..................................................................................................70 6.8.4 TSA Map Copy....................................................................................................70 6.9 Alarm Setup.............................................................................................................71 6.9.1 System Alarm......................................................................................................71 6.9.2 STM1 & HP Alarm...............................................................................................72 6.9.3 East TUG3 Alarm Setup .....................................................................................72 6.9.4 West TUG3 Alarm Setup ....................................................................................73 6.9.5 East TU Alarm Mask ...........................................................................................73 6.9.6 West TU Alarm Mask ..........................................................................................74 6.9.7 East TU Alarm Relay ..........................................................................................74 6.9.8 West TU Alarm Relay .........................................................................................75 6.9.9 East TU Alarm Severity.......................................................................................75
ii
6.9.10 West TU Alarm Severity .................................................................................76 6.9.11 External (Environment) Alarm ........................................................................76 6.10 Sotre/ Restrieve Backup Configuration ...................................................................77 6.11 File Transfer ............................................................................................................77 6.11.1 Download Mainboard Firware.........................................................................67 6.11.2 Download Current Configuration ....................................................................67 6.11.3 Download Backup Configuration ....................................................................68 6.11.4 Upload Current Configuration from FLASH....................................................68 6.11.5 Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH....................................................69 6.11.6 Change Firmware Boot Bank .........................................................................69 6.12 Loopback Setup ......................................................................................................70 6.13 Performance Setup/ Clear.......................................................................................70 6.13.1 Clear Performance Data.................................................................................71 6.13.2 Performance Threshold Setup .......................................................................71 6.14 Unit Init/Clear...........................................................................................................72 6.14.1 Init Mismatch Unit ...........................................................................................73 6.14.2 Clear Removed Unit .......................................................................................73 6.15 Alarm Cut Off...........................................................................................................74 6.16 System Reset ..........................................................................................................74 6.17 Clear Alarm History .................................................................................................75 6.18 Return to Default .....................................................................................................76 6.19 Unit Menu - E1/ T1 ..................................................................................................76 6.19.1 TSA Setting Display........................................................................................77 6.19.2 Current TSA Status ........................................................................................78 6.19.3 Config Display ................................................................................................79 6.19.3.1 Channel Line Interface Display..............................................................80 6.19.3.2 Channel Path Overhead Display ...........................................................81 6.19.4 Current Alarm Status ......................................................................................82 6.19.5 Unit Performance Display...............................................................................84 6.19.5.1 1-Hour Perf. Report................................................................................85 6.19.5.2 24-Hour Perf. Report..............................................................................87 6.19.5.3 7-Day Perf. Report .................................................................................89 6.19.6 Unit Diagnostics Display.................................................................................92 6.19.7 TSA Setup ......................................................................................................93 6.19.7.1 TSA Enter ..............................................................................................94 6.19.7.2 Channel TSA Delete ..............................................................................95 6.19.8 Config Setup ...................................................................................................96 6.19.8.1 Channel Line Interface Setup ................................................................97 6.19.8.2 Channel Path Overhead Setup..............................................................98 6.19.8.3 Customer Information Setup..................................................................99 6.19.9 Unit Loopback & Diagnostics Setup .............................................................100 6.19.9.1 Channel Loopback Setup ..............................................................100 6.19.9.2 Unit Diagnostics Setup ..................................................................101 6.19.10 Unit Alarm Setup ..........................................................................................102 6.19.11 Unit Performance Setup/ Clear.....................................................................103 6.19.11.1 Clear Performance Data ......................................................................104 6.19.11.2 Performance Thershold Setup.............................................................105 6.19.12 Clear Unit Alarm History ...............................................................................106 6.19.13 Unit Load Default..........................................................................................107 6.20 Unit Menu - E3/ T3 ................................................................................................108 6.20.1 TSA Setting Display......................................................................................109 6.20.2 Current TSA Status ......................................................................................110 6.20.3 Current Alarm Status ....................................................................................111 6.20.4 Unit Performance Display.............................................................................112 6.20.4.1 1-Hour Perf. Report..............................................................................113 6.20.4.2 24-Hour Perf. Report............................................................................115 6.20.4.3 7-Day Perf. Report ...............................................................................117 6.20.5 Diagnostics Display ......................................................................................119
iii
6.20.6 TSA Setup ....................................................................................................120 6.20.6.1 TSA Enter ............................................................................................121 6.20.6.2 Channel TSA Delete ............................................................................122 6.20.7 Config Setup .................................................................................................123 6.20.7.1 Transmit Length Setup ........................................................................124 6.20.7.2 Transmit C2 Setup ...............................................................................125 6.20.7.3 Customer Information Setup................................................................126 6.20.8 Unit Loopback & Diagnostics Setup .............................................................127 6.20.8.1 P3M3 Loopback Setup .......................................................................128 6.20.8.2 Unit Diagnostics Setup ........................................................................129 6.20.9 Unit Alarm Setup ..........................................................................................130 6.20.10 Uint Performance Setup/ Clear.....................................................................131 6.20.10.1 Clear Performance Data ......................................................................132 6.20.10.2 Performance Threshold Setup.............................................................133 6.20.11 Clear Unit Alarm History ...............................................................................134 6.20.12 Unit Load Default..........................................................................................135 6.21 Unit Menu - Ethernet .............................................................................................136 6.21.1 TSA Setting Display......................................................................................137 6.21.2 Current TSA Status ......................................................................................138 6.21.3 LCAS chan deleting Status...........................................................................138 6.21.4 Current Alarm Status ....................................................................................139 6.21.5 Performance .................................................................................................139 6.21.5.1 1-Hour Perf. Report..............................................................................140 6.21.5.2 24-Hour Perf. Report............................................................................141 6.21.5.3 7-Day Perf. Report ...............................................................................142 6.21.6 VCG Statistics ..............................................................................................143 6.21.6.1 VCG Statistics......................................................................................143 6.21.6.2 Active VCG Channel Size ....................................................................144 6.21.6.3 Diagnostics Display ........................................................................145 6.21.7 Switch Status ................................................................................................145 6.21.8 Unit Bridge Info Display ................................................................................147 6.21.9 TSA Setup ....................................................................................................148 6.21.9.1 LCAS TSA Enter (TU1x)......................................................................149 6.21.9.2 LCAS TSA Enter (TU3)........................................................................149 6.21.9.3 LCAS Channel TSA Delete..................................................................150 6.21.9.4 nonLCAS TSA Enter (TU1x)................................................................151 6.21.9.5 nonLCAS TSA Enter (TU3)..................................................................151 6.21.9.6 nonLCAS Channel TSA Delete............................................................152 6.21.10 Mode Setup ..................................................................................................152 6.21.11 Config Setup .................................................................................................153 6.21.11.1 VCG Encapsulation Type Setup ..........................................................153 6.21.11.2 VCG Encapsulation Par Setup ............................................................154 6.21.11.3 VCG Differential Delay Compensation Setup......................................155 6.21.11.4 Customer Information Setup................................................................156 6.21.11.5 Link Config Setup .....................................................................................156 6.21.11.6 Linkdown Mask Setup ..............................................................................157 6.21.11.7 Shortened IPG Setup ...............................................................................157 6.21.12 Performance Setup/ Clear ............................................................................158 6.21.12.1 Unit Clear Performance Data...............................................................158 6.21.12.2 Unit Performance Threshold Setup .....................................................159 6.21.13 RMII Diagnostic Setup..................................................................................159 6.21.13.1 RMII Loopback Test.............................................................................160 6.21.13.2 RMII Test pattern Setup.......................................................................160 6.21.14 Switch Qos Setup .........................................................................................161 6.21.14.1 Priority Mode Setup .............................................................................161 6.21.14.2 Tx/ Drop Priority (Fixed) Setup ............................................................162 6.21.14.3 Tx/ Drop Priority (Vlan tag) Setup........................................................163 6.21.14.4 Tx/ Drop Priority (TOS field) Setup ......................................................164
iv
6.21.14.5 Tx/ Drop Priority (TCP/UDP port) Setup ..............................................165 6.21.14.6 DSEF Setup .........................................................................................167 6.21.14.7 Distrusted Port Setup...........................................................................168 6.21.14.8 Congestion Control functioin Setup .....................................................168 6.21.14.9 Flow Control Setup ..............................................................................170 6.21.14.10 Rate Control Setup ..............................................................................171 6.21.15 Unit Bridge Info Setup ..................................................................................173 6.21.16 VLAN Setup ..................................................................................................174 6.21.16.1 VLAN T ype Code .............................................................................175 6.21.16.2 VLAN Configuration........................................................................176 6.21.16.3 Switch VLAN T able Setup ............................................................177 6.21.16.4 GVRP Setup .....................................................................................177 6.21.17 Clear Unit Alarm History ...............................................................................178 6.21.18 Unit Load Default..........................................................................................178 7 APPENDIX A IP PHONE AND SIP PROXY SERVER ................................................209 7.1 SIP Proxy Server...................................................................................................209 7.1.1 Generic Setup Procedure .................................................................................209 7.1.2 Specific Setup Example -- Using ININ SIP Proxy Server .................................210 7.2 IP Phone................................................................................................................216 7.2.1 Generic Setup ...................................................................................................216 7.2.2 Specific Setup Example-- Using IP Phone .......................................................217 APPENDIX B ACRONYMS .........................................................................................222 APPENDIX C MANAGEMENT OVER LOOP SDH PRODUCTS ................................223 9.1 Overview of Management Network Types ............................................................223 9.1.1 Terminology ......................................................................................................223 9.2 Pure Layer-2 Switching Network...........................................................................224 9.3 Separate IP Subnet using External Router ...........................................................225 9.4 Separate IP Subnet using Built-in Router (GNE) ..................................................226 APPENDIX: MIB ALARM TRAP INFORMATION......................................................227
8 9
10
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1- 1 GSM Application Illustration .....................................................................................2 Figure 1- 2 Acces Application Illustration ...................................................................................3 Figure 1- 3 Smart Building Application Illustration......................................................................4 Figure 1- 4 POTS Switch Application Illustration........................................................................5 Figure 1- 5 Dual Homing Application Illustration ........................................................................6 Figure 2- 1 Illustration for 1U ANSI shelf with power supply ...................................................19 Figure 2- 2 Illustration for 1U ETSI shelf with power supply ...................................................19 Figure 2- 3 Illustration for 3U ANSI shelf with power supply ...................................................20 Figure 2- 4 Illustration for 3U ETSI shelf with power supply ...................................................20 Figure 2- 5 Panel View for 1U ANSI Shelf................................................................................21 Figure 2- 6 Panel View for 1U ETSI Shelf ................................................................................22 Figure 2- 7 Panel View for 3U ANSI Shelf................................................................................23 Figure 2- 8 Panel View for 3U ETSI Shelf ................................................................................24 Figure 2- 9 WW Connection Panel ...........................................................................................25 Figure 2- 10 RJ Connection Panel ...........................................................................................25 Figure 2- 11 BNC Connection Panel ........................................................................................25 Figure 2- 12 Jumper Setting for DS3/ E3 Interface ..................................................................31 Figure 3- 1 Loop- O9100 1U Led Panel ...................................................................................44 Figure 3- 2 Achitecture of GARP ..............................................................................................52 Figure 3- 3 Architecture of GID................................................................................................53 Figure 3- 4 Network Example using GVRP .............................................................................54 Figure 3- 5 Timing Inputs of O9100.........................................................................................57 Figure 4- 1 Loopback Block Diagram .......................................................................................65 Figure 6- 1 SSM mode clock ....................................................................................................82 Figure 7- 1 O9100 STM1 Ring ...............................................................................................209 Figure 9- 1 Pure Layer-2 Ethernet Switching Network ...........................................................224 Figure 9- 2 Separate IP Subnet using External Router ..........................................................225 Figure 9- 3 Separate IP Subnet using Built-in Router (GNE) .................................................226
LIST OF TABLES
Table 2- 1 DB9S Console Port Pin Assignment ..................................................................................... 26 Table 2- 2 SNMP Ethernet Port.............................................................................................................. 26 Table 2- 3 RJ11 Connector for OW (Order Wire)................................................................................... 27 Table 2- 4 Alarm Relay Connector ......................................................................................................... 27 Table 2- 5 Power Connector................................................................................................................... 27 Table 2- 6 RJ45 Connector for TS1 (Timing Source1)/ TS2 (Timing Source2) ..................................... 27 Table 2- 7 RJ45 Connector for ALM IN (Environment Alarm Input)....................................................... 27 Table 2- 8 RJ45 Connector for SWB (Switching Box)............................................................................ 27 Table 2- 9 RJ45 Connector for EOH OP (East Overheat Output).......................................................... 28 Table 2- 10 RJ45 Connector for EOH IP (East Overheat Input) ............................................................ 28 Table 2- 11 RJ45 Connector for WOH OP (West Overheat Output)...................................................... 28 Table 2- 12 RJ45 Connector for WOH IP (West Overheat Input) .......................................................... 28 Table 2- 13 SCSI Connector for E1/ T1 Line.......................................................................................... 29 Table 2- 14 Ethernet Port ....................................................................................................................... 30 Table 2- 15 DS3/ E3 Jumper Setting...................................................................................................... 31 Table 2- 16 Default Software Configuration ........................................................................................... 32 Table 3 - 1 Console Port Setting ..............................................................................................33 Table 3 - 2 Alarm Default - for System and STM1 & HP ..........................................................34 Table 3 - 3 Alarm Default - for TU ............................................................................................35 Table 3 - 4 Performance Parameter List Optical ...................................................................35
vi
Table 3 - 5 Performance Parameter List - E1...........................................................................35 Table 3 - 6 Performance Parameter List - DS1 ........................................................................36 Table 3 - 7 Performance Parameter List - E3/ T3 ....................................................................36 Table 3 - 8 Performance Parameter List - Ethernet .................................................................36 Table 3 - 9 Performance Report Options .................................................................................32 Table 3 - 10 LED Indication for Main Unit ................................................................................43 Table 3 - 11 LED Indications for System Mode........................................................................44 Table 3 - 12 LED Indication for Plug-in Module........................................................................44
vii
Bitte fhren Sie das Gert am Ende seinerLewbensdauer den zue Verfgung stehended Rckgabeund Sammelsystemen zu. At the end of the product's useful life, please dispose of it at appropriate collection points provided in your country Une fois le produit en fin devie, veuillez le dposer dans un point de recyclage appropri.
GB
ES
Para preservar el medio ambiente, al final dela vida til de su producto, depositelo en los laguares destinado aello de acuerdo con la legislacin vigente. No final de vida til do producto, por favor coloque no ponto de recolha apropriado. Onde tutelare l'ambiente, non buttate l'apparecchio trai i normali rifiuti al termine della sua vita utile, ma portatelo presso i punti do taccolta specifici per questi rifiuti previsti dalla normativa vigente. Wij raden u aan het apparant aan het einde van zijn nuttige levensduur, niet bij hey gewone huisafval te deponeren, maar op de dearvoor bestemde adressen. Nr produktet er udtjent, bor det brtskaffes via de s rlige indsamlingssteder i landet. Ved slutten av produktets levetid br det avhendes p en kommunal miljstasjon eller leveres til en elektroforhandler. Lmna vnligen in produkten p lmplig tervinningsstation nr den r frbrukad. Hvit tuote kytin pttyess viemll se asianmukaiseen keryspisteeseen. Gdy produkt nie nadaje sie juz do dalszego uzytku, nalezy zostawic go w jednym ze specjalnych punktw zajmujacych sie zbirka zuzytych producktw w wybranych miejscach na terenie kraju. Po skonen jeho ivotnosti odlote prosm vrobek na pislunm sbrnm mst zzenm dle pedpis ve va zemi. Po skonen jeho ivotnosti odovzdajte prosm zariadenie na prslunom zbernom mieste poda platnch miestnych predpisov a noriem. Ko se izdelku iztee ivljenska doba, ga odnesite na ustrezno zbirno mesto oziroma ga odvrzite v skladu z veljavnimi predpisi. . ,
P I
NL
DK N
S FIN PL
CZ
SK
SLO
GR
PRC
viii
Chapter 1 Product Description
1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
1.1 Function Description
Loop-O9100 ADM/TM is an economic compact STM1 ADM & TM Multiplexer, designed to add & drop up to below interfaces: 112 x E1/T1 Tributaries 6 x E3/T3 Tributaries 12 x 10/100M Ethernet Tributaries All interfaces of O9100 are fully compliant with ETSI standards and ITU recommendations. With up to 4 aggregate optical/electrical STM-1 interfaces, the O9100 can support a versatile protection scheme including SNCP and MSP (1+1) protection for ring and linear network topologies. Also, the O9100 provides powerful Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning (OAM&P) functions, including fault management, performance monitoring, configuration management, and network security management. By using O9100's console port, LAN port, and DCC channel, the OAM&P can be achieved easily for local side and remote side via SNMP or menu-driven interfaces. All O9100's interfaces are consistent with Telecommunication Management Network concept (ITU M.30, G.784) for SDH network Element/ Operations System (NE/OS), NE/NE, and NE/Craft communications. For centralized management, users, no matter local or remote, can benefit from Loop's powerful SDH EMS/ NMS. Ethernet Order Wire (EOW) is provided using VoIP technology.
1.2 Application
The O9100 can be configured as a Terminal Multiplexer (TM), a Linear Add/Drop Multiplexer (LADM) with the same enclosure. With SNCP and MSP(1+1) protection, the O9100 can easily provide a well-protected transmission path in various applications, shown as below.
Figure 1- 1 GSM Application Illustration
Access Total Solution

STM1 DS3 E1/T1
SDH Backbone DDN Internet
V4100 UMAP
112 x E1/T1 6 x E3/T3 32 x ethernet
O9100 STM1 ADM
E3/T3 E1/T1 Ethernet
O9100 STM1 ADM NMS
O9100 STM1 ADM
O9100 STM1 ADM

Two Linear STM-1 with MSP (1+1) protection
Regenerator
O9100 STM1 ADM

0 1
O9100 STM1 ADM 0 1 E1/ T1 E1/ T1 E3/ DS3 V4200-9
10/100
Ethernet Switch
rnet ernet M Ethe M Eth E1/ T1 E1/ T1 0/100 1 IP6324 AM3420 AM3440 IP-DSLAM
4E1
E1/ T1 IP6440 IP6610
V420028
ADSL
E1200
U3500
E1500
H3300 G.shdsl
H3900 HDSL PC LAN PBX
Figure 1- 2 Access Application Illustration
Figure 1- 3 Smart Building Application Illustration
Figure 1- 4 POTS Switch Application Illustration
Dual Homing Application
E1 Network
E1 Network
E1
O9100 with CO (Ring Closure)
E1
When
1 or 2 occurs:
When
3 or 4 occurs:
2
O9100 with CO (Ring Closure) O9100 with CO (Ring Closure)
4
O9100 with CO (Ring Closure) O9100 with CO (Ring Closure)
E1
AM3440 with 2 Quad E1 cards
E1
E1
E1
1 + 1 Line Protection
AM3440 with 2 Quad E1 cards
Note:
1
2
and
3 4
are fiber broken
and
are equipment broken
Figure 1- 5 Dual Homing Application Illustration
1.3 Loop-O9100 Topology and Protection Types

1.3.1 Overview Two types of protection are available for Loop-O9100: (1) MSP (Multiplexer Section Protection) 1+1 and (2) SNCP (Sub-Network Connection Protection), also called UPSR (Uni-directional Path-protection Self-healing Ring). Bsically, under MSP 1+1 protection type, an entire span (including all teimslots of the span) is protected. For SDH, the span is defined as a Multiplexer Section; For SONET, the span is defined as a line. Under SNCP/UPSR protection type, an individual tributary can be protected by path selectors at the path termination points on receive side. In the following sections, signal transmission path and protection schemes in different topologies for Loop-O9100 will be discussed. As for the relative features of transmitting signals with or without probection will be mentioned later also. for customers who need dual tributary lines at high-traffic locations.
1.3.2 Configuration 1: Linear Topology without Protection This practical configuration is applied for a linear topology with limitative clients NE (Network Element) layout, and fiber availability.
Linear Topology Without Protection
Span of : Multiplexer Sections (SDH) or Lines (SONET)
Terminal Multiplexer
Add/Drop Multiplexer
Terminal Multiplexer
Add/Drop Capacity: TM = 63 E1 (Limiting factor is STM-1 capacity); ADM = 112 E1 (Limiting factor is the add/drop capacity of the 4 E1 cards.) Advantages: A simple, two (2) fiber layout Cost of Advantages: No protection against a fiber cut and/or optical circuit pack failure
1.3.3 Configuration 2: Linear Topology With MSP (1+1) Protection This configuration is ideal in a linear topology with spare fiber available. The client can benefit from both protection against a fiber cut and protection against optical circuit pack failure. For A B direction of MSP 1+1 protection scheme, the whole outgoing payload is dual-fed into the working section/line and the protection section/line at node A. Payloads from both sections are received at node B. Since the integrity and algorithm provided by the Multiplex Section are embedded into the transport frame, only one of the payloads will be selected and used at node B. This is how MSP 1+1 works. Note that the paths or sub-channels within the Multiplexing Section are treated as a whole pipe, in terms of the MSP 1+1 protection. The payload of the selected pipe is from the working section/line or the protection section/line.
Linear Topology With MSP 1+1 Protection
Working Section/ Line
TM
Protection Section/ Line
ADM
ADM
ADM
TM
MSP 1+1 Protection Scheme

Working Line Protection Line
2:1 select
A
Working Line
2:1 select
B
Protection Line
Add/Drop Capacity: TM = 63 E1s with MSP protection (Limiting factor is STM-1 capacity); ADM = 112 E1s with MSP protection (Limiting factor is the add/drop capacity of the 4 E1 cards.) Advantages: All tributary traffic is protected against a fiber cut and/or optical circuit pack failure Cost of Advantages: Four (4) fibers are required. Maximum 63 E1s capacity at head ends (TMs) NOTE: To achieve the best protection, the working fibers shall take different routes in different
Chapter 1 Product Description fiber bundles.
1.3.4 Configuration 3: Ring Topology with SNCP/UPSR Protection This configuration is useful for clients need full path protection in a ring topology. In the B A direction, at Node B the tributary traffic is fed into both the working path and the protected path. Both of these paths are received at Node A. Only one of them will be selected and fed to the output of the tributary. If one of the traffic paths fails to make it to Node A because of a fiber cut or other problems, the path selector inside of Node A will switch to the active path. Each tributary in the node has a path selector associated with it. The path selectors are independent of each other. If all the tributaries are E1 and all are provisioned with path protection, the maximum add/drop capacity of the whole STM-1 ring is 63 E1s.
E1 or DS3 Output B A
E1 or DS3 Input A B Node A
Working Protection
STM-1
STM-1 SNCP/UPSR Protection Architecture

STM-1
Protection
Working
Node B B A A B
E1 or DS3 Input
E1 or DS3 Output
Add/Drop Capacity: 63 E1s with SNCP/UPSR protection (Limiting factor is the bandwidth of the STM-1 aggregate line.) Advantages: Two (2) fibers only; well protected against a fiber cut and optical circuit pack failure. Cost of Advantages: Ring topology is a must
Chapter 1 Product Description 1.3.5 Configuration 4: Ring Topology Without Protection This configuration is useful to clients who require a maximum add/drop capacity of 112 E1s at a node in a ring topology This application assumes a case where there is a traffic flow of more than 63 E1s between POTS Switch 1 and POTS Switch 4. The E1 tributary adding to or dropping from the O9100 can be set up in a way that no SNCP/UPSR protection is configured. Theoretically, the maximum capacity between POTS SW1 and POTS SW4 is 126 E1s without SNCP/UPSR dual-feed protection in a ring topology like this. 63 E1s travel through the EAST side, while the other 63 E1s travel through the WEST side. When there is a fiber cut anywhere in the ring, half of the traffic between SW1 and SW4 will be gone, but the other half will be unaffected. This approach will provide another form of protection, implicit protection, if the switches or end equipment can still work with half of the traffic gone. This implicit protection scheme can be achieved through careful network planning. The traffic between any two nodes can be separated into two groups. Each of them is deliberately directed to a different route to achieve the implicit protection goal. This configuration is good in terms of both maximum capacity and implicit protection. Owing to the limit of 4 E1 cards available on the O-9100, the maximum number of E1s added to or dropped from a node is 112 (4x28), instead of 126.
POTS SW1 63E1 63E1
ADM
East West
ADM
STM-1 Ring without Path Protection
ADM
West
East
ADM
63E1 POTS SW4
63E1
Add/Drop Capacity: 112 E1s without protection (Limiting factor is the number of E1 cards.) Advantages: Two (2) fibers only; maximum number of E1s is 112 Cost of Advantages: Ring topology is a must. Half of the traffic will be affected when fiber cut.
10
1.3.6 Configuration 5: Ring Topology With and Without Protection This configuration is useful to clients who need more than 63 E1s throughput. While still staying with the STM-1 ring, they will have mixed traffic types, some with explicit SNCP/UPSR protection and some without. It is possible to set up an O-9100 network that combines Configuration 3 and Configuration 4 in a ring topology where the client can determine what to protect and what not to protect. The advantage of this system is that vital traffic flow can be protected (at a cost of otherwise available E1s) while leaving other paths or lines unprotected and thus fully utilized to carry non-vital traffic. This way, the client protects what needs to be protected, and gains back some capacity in the unprotected areas. It is a flexible network well suited to the needs of some clients.
Add/Drop Capacity: 63 to 112 E1s (Limiting factor is the number of E1 cards.) Advantages: Two fibers only; adding/dropping more than 63 E1s per node Cost of Advantages: Ring topology is a must. Half of the traffic without protection will be affected when a fiber is cut.
11
1.3.7 Configuration 6: Ring Topology with both MSP (1+1) and SNCP/UPSR Protection This configuration is useful to clients who need thorough protection against double fiber cuts and optical circuit pack failure.
O 9100 ADM
O 9100 ADM
O 9100 ADM
Loop SDH STM-1 Ring with Double Protection

[SNCP/UPSR & MSP (1+1)]
E1/T1 E3/T3 Ethernet E1/T1 E3/T3 Ethernet
O 9100 ADM
O 9100 ADM
O 9100 ADM
Add/Drop Capacity: 63 E1s with double protection (Limiting factor is the bandwidth of the STM-1 aggregate line.) Advantages: Double protection is provided by SNCP/UPSR and MSP Cost of Advantages: Ring topology is a must; four (4) fibers are necessary
12
Chapter 1 Product Description 1.3.8 Configuration 7: Dual-Homing ADM with Dual Tributary Lines at both Central Site and Remote Site This O-9100 high availability configuration is good for carriers who want high availability at the nodes of high importance where the traffic load is heavy and normal availability at the nodes of low importance, where the traffic load is light.
Dual-Homing ADM Protection with Dual Tributary Lines
E1/DS1 E3/DS3 Ethernet
Loop ADM Loop ADM
Remote Site West East

Working Tributary Access Equipment
(eg. Loop AM 3440, V4200....)
Standby Tributary
Loop ADM
STM-1 Ring
West
East Central Site
1. Dual-homing ADMs (ADM-a and ADM-b) at node of high importance such as the Central Site. 2. Redundant tributary lines, working and standby, are added/dropped through different ADMs. 3. Redundant tributary lines take different routes. One is from the East side through ADM-b. One is from the West side through ADM-a. No SNCP protection is required. 4.The protection switching is done on the external access equipment (eg. Loop-AM 3440).
ADM-a Working Tributary
ADM-b Standby Tributary
1. Single-homing ADM at nodes of lesser importance. 2. Redundant tributary lines, working and standby, are added/dropped through the same ADM. 3. Redundant tributary lines take different routes. One is from the East side through ADM-b. One is from the West side through ADM-a. No SNCP protection is required. 4. The protection switching is done on the external access equipment (eg. Loop-AM 3440).
AccessEquipment
(eg. Loop AM 3440, V4200....)
Prerequisites: Redundant tributary line protection switching capability is required on the external access equipment at both the central and remote site.
Advantages: Hi g h a v a i la b i l it y, e v e n i n t h e f ac e of t h e f a i l ur e of o n e en t ir e n od e at t he c e ntr a l s it e. Cost of Advantages: One additional Loop ADM at the central site. Redundant tributary lines to the access equipment at both the central site and the remote site.
13
Chapter 1 Product Description 1.3.9 Configuration 8: Dual-Homing ADM Protection with Dual Tributary Lines at the Central Site and A Single Tributary Line at the Remote Site This O-9100 high availability configuration is good for carriers who want high availability at the nodes of high importance where the traffic load is heavy and normal availability at the nodes of low importance, where the traffic load is light.
Dual-Homing ADM Protection with Dual Tributary Lines at the Central Site and A Single Tributary Line at the Remote Site
Loop ADM Loop ADM
Remote Site West East

Single Tributary Access Equipment
(eg. Loop AM 3440, V4200....)
Loop ADM
STM-1 Ring
ADM-a Working
West
East
Central Site
ADM-a Working Tributary ADM-b Standby Tributary
1. Single-homing ADM at nodes of lesser importance. 2. Single tributary line is fed in two directions (East and West) towards the central site. The setting at the remote site has SNCP path protection. 3. The protection switching is done by this remote site ADM. .
1. Dual-homing ADMs (ADM-a and ADM-b) at node of high importance such as Central Site. 2. Redundant tributary lines, working and standby, are added/dropped through different ADMs. 3. Redundant tributary lines take different routes. One is from the East side through ADM-b. One is from the West side through ADM-a. No ADM protection is required. 4.The protection switching is done on the external access equipment (eg. Loop-AM 3440).
AccessEquipment
(eg. Loop AM 3440, V4200....)
Prerequisites: Redundant tributary line protection switching capability is required on the external access equipment at the central site only. The remote site does not require this capability. Advantages: High availability, even in the face of the failure of one entire node at the central site. Redundancy of the tributary line at the remote site is not required. Cost of Advantages: One additional Loop ADM at the central site. Redundant tributary lines to the access equipment at the central site.
14
1.4 Specifications
Physical/Electrical Dimensions for 3U Dimensions for 1U Power (AC) Power (DC) Temperature Humidity Mounting EOW LAN port Console port E1/T1 interface connector Optical Interface connector Number of Optical STM1 Number of E1/T1 channels Clock Source Internal, STM1-Line, External, Tributaries (for Port 4 of each E1/T1 module and Port 1 of each DS3/E3 module) Max. Number of Tributary Modules For 1U shelf: 56 x E1/T1 Tributaries 3 x DS3/E3 Tributaries 4 x 10/100M Ethernet Tributaries Optical STM1 aggregate line STM1 Optical Transmitter RMS Wavelength 1 Wavelength 2 Output Power Extinction Ratio Connector Sensitivity Connector Max. 6 nm Max. 1350 nm, Min. 1280 nm Max. 1590, Min. 1520 nm Min. 12 dBm Min. 10 dB SC, FC, or Electric connector Max. input power 0 dBm, Min. input power 34 dBm SC, FC, or Electric connector For 3U shelf: 112 x E1/T1 Tributaries 6 x DS3/E3 Tributaries 12 x 10/100M Ethernet Tributaries 126mm x 300mm x 482mm (H/D/W) 42mm x 300mm x 482mm (H/D/W) 90 to 240 VAC, 50/60Hz -24 Vdc (-18 to -36 Vdc) -48 Vdc (-36 to -75 Vdc) 0 to 50C 0-95%RH (non-condensing) Desk-top stackable, 19/23 inch rack mountable, and wall mountable RJ-11 RJ-45 DB-9 SCSI-II 68 pins FC or SC 2 or 4 (only available on the 3U model) 4/ 12/ 20/ 28 (on base unit)
STM1 Optical Receiver
Tributary Modules E1 module Line Rate 2.048 Mbps 50 ppm Line Code AMI/HDB3 Input Signal ITU G.703 Jitter ITU G.823 Output Signal ITU G.703 T1 module Line Rate Line Code Input Signal Jitter 1.544 Mbps 32 ppm AMI/B8ZS DSX-1 0dB to 30dB w/ALBO AT&T TR 62411
Framing Connector Total Channels Electrical Multiplexing Framing Connector Total Channels Multiplexing
Unframed Two SCSI-II 68-pin connectors 28 75 coax/120 twisted pair G.707 Unframed Two SCSI-II 68-pin connectors 28 G.707
15
Chapter 1 Product Description Output Signal DS3 module Data Rate Line Code Connector Impedance Multiplexing E3 module Data Rate Line Code Connector Total Ports Multiplexing Data Rate Layer2 Protocol Multiplexing Processing Protocol 34.368 Mbps 20ppm HDB3 BNC connector 1 or 3 G.707 Impedance Framing Output Mask Jitter 75 Ohm Coax Unframed ETS 300 689 Sec.4.2.1.2 ITU G.703 ITU G.823 44.736 Mbps 20ppm B3ZS BNC connector 75 Ohm Coax G.707 Framing Output Mask Total Ports Jitter Unframed Bellcore GR-499-core 1 or 3 ITU G.824 DSX-1 w/0, -7.5, -15 dB LBO
Ethernet module 10/100Mbps Connector Ethernet VCAT G.707 Total Ports VCAT, GFP(G.7041), LAPS, and LCAS (G.7042) RJ-45 connector n x VC12, n x VC11, or n x VC3 4
Compliance Standards EMC EN55024 EMI EN55022 Class A, 47 CFR Part 15 Subpart B Class A Safety UL60950 CSA60950 IEC60950 Environment EN300 019-2-1 T1.3 EN300 019-2-2 T2.3 EN300 019-2-3 T3.2 Standards Compliance ITU G.664, G.707, G.7041, G.7042, G.775, G.783, G.806, G.823, G.747, X.86 ANSI T1.105, T1.107 IEEE 802.1q (VLAN), 802.1w (RSTP), 802.1s (MSTP), 802.1ad (stack VLAN), 802.3x (flow control), 802.1p (QoS)
16
Chapter 2 Installation
2 INSTALLATION
2.1 Site Selection
The following list indicates a site selection guideline. User need to follow this guideline to select a proper installation site. Location of the Loop-O9100 unit should be part of the central office equipment layout design. Considerations should be given to entrance cable routing. The installation site should provide proper room for adequate ventilation and cable routing. Reserve at least 0.5 m at the rear of the unit for human access, cables, and air flow. The site should provide a stable environment. The operating area should be clean and free from extremes of temperature, humidity, shock, and vibration. Relative humidity should stay between 0 and 95%.
18
2.2 Mechanical Installation

Loop-O9100 supports hot swappable plug-in power supply. For 1U height ANSI shelf, three plug-in power module options are available: (1) AC, (2) 24Vdc, and (3) 48Vdc. Since the 1U height ANSI shelf supports two power slots, users may plug two power modules in for power redundancy usage.
1U ANSI Shelf
Blank panel
Rea r Pa nel
Plug-in power supply (AC, 24Vdc, 48Vdc)
1U ANSI Shelf
Two plug-in power supplies (AC, 24Vdc, 48Vdc)
Rea
r Pa nel
Figure 2- 1 Illustration for 1U ANSI shelf with power supply
For 1U height ETSI shelf, three plug-in power module options are available: (1) AC, (2) 24Vdc, and (3) 48Vdc. Since the 1U height ETSI shelf supports one power slot only, no power redundancy is available in this shelf.
1U ETSI Shelf
Plug-in power supply (AC, 24Vdc, 48Vdc)
Fro nt P ane l
Figure 2- 2 Illustration for 1U ETSI shelf with power supply
19
For 3U height ANSI shelf supports up to three power supplies and three plug-in power module options are available on the front side of main unit: (1) AC, (2) 24Vdc, and (3) 48Vdc.
3U ANSI Shelf
Blank panel or up to 3 plug-in power supplies (AC, 24Vdc, 48Vdc)
Rea r
P an el
Figure 2- 3 Illustration for 3U ANSI shelf with power supply
For 3U height ETSI shelf supports up to three power supplies and three plug-in power module options are available on the front side of main unit: (1) AC, (2) 24Vdc, and (3) 48Vdc.
3U ETSI Shelf
Blank panel or up to 3 plug-in power supplies (AC, 24Vdc, 48Vdc)
Fro nt P a
nel
Figure 2- 4 Illustration for 3U ETSI shelf with power supply
20
Front panels and rear panels are shown in the following figures.
1U ANSI Shelf without LCD Display (Front Panel)

Loop-O STM1 ADM/TM
TM
TX Wa
RX
TX Ea
RX
ACO OW Wb Eb ACTIVE
LINK/ACT
10/100
RST
9600,N.8,1
POWER
CO
Wa
Ea MjMn
OW
SNMP
CONSOLE
Loop-O STM1 ADM/TM
TM
Wa
Ea
ACO OW Wb Eb ACTIVE
LINK/ACT
10/100
RST
9600,N.8,1
TX
RX
TX
RX
POWER
CO
Wa
Ea MjMn
OW
SNMP
CONSOLE
1U ANSI Shelf (RearPanel)

SWB WOH IP EOH IP TS2
E1/T1 PORT 1 - 12 PORT 13 - 28
RELAY
NC COM NO
E1/T1
ALM IN
WOH OP EOH OP
TS1
PORT 1 - 12
PORT 13 - 28
1
AC LINE, 100-240VAC, 50/60Hz, 0.4A MAX.
2
AC power supply
24V 1.2A
48V 0.4A
-V +V
-V +V
24V DC power supply
48V DC power supply
Figure 2- 5 Panel View for 1U ANSI Shelf
21
1U ETSI Shelf (Front Panel)

SNMP
LINK/ACT 10/100
RST
ACTIVE Eb
Wb OW
ACO
TS2
E1/T1
PORT 1 - 12
PORT 13 - 28
OW
MjMn Ea
Wa CO
POWER
RELAY
NC COM NO
E1/T1
TX Wa RX
TX
Ea
RX
CONSOLE
TS1
PORT 1 - 12
PORT 13 - 28
1
2
AC power supply
24V 1.2A
48V 0.4A
-V +V
-V +V
24V DC power supply
48V DC power supply
1U ETSI Shelf (Rear Panel)
Figure 2- 6 Panel View for 1U ETSI Shelf
22
3U ANSI Shelf (Front Panel)
1 SC Connector
Wb Eb TX RX TX RX
2 FC Connector
Wb Eb
3 Electric Connector
Wb Eb TX RX TX RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX Wa
RX
TX Ea
RX
TX Wa
RX
TX Ea
RX
TX Wa
RX
TX Ea
RX
Loop-O STM1 ADM/TM

Wb Eb
TM
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX Wa
RX
TX Ea
RX
ACO
10/100 LINK/ACT
OW Wb
Eb ACTIVE
RST
9600,N.8,1
POWER
CO Wa
Ea MjMn
OW
SNMP
CONSOLE
3U ANSI Shelf (Rear Panel)

ETHERNET
LINK/ACT 10/100 LINK/ACT 10/100 LINK/ACT 10/100 LINK/ACT 10/100
D
PORT 1 DS3/E3 PORT 2 PORT 3 PORT 4
POWER 1
POWER 2
POWER 3
C
TX E1/T1 PORT 1 RX TX PORT 2 RX TX PORT 3 RX
PORT 1 - 12
PORT 13 - 28
SWB
WOH IP
EOH IP
TS2
RELAY
NC COM NO
E1/T1
PORT 1 - 12
PORT 13 - 28
ALM IN
WOH OP EOH OP
TS1
1 AC power supply
(fixed/ plug-in)
2 24V DC power supply

(fixed/ plug-in)

(fixed/ plug-in)
-V +V
Figure 2- 7 Panel View for 3U ANSI Shelf
24V 1.2A
-V +V
48V 0.4A
23
3U ETSI Shelf (Front Panel)
1 SC Connector
Wb Eb TX Wa RX TX Ea RX
2 FC Connector
Wb Eb TX Wa RX TX Ea RX
3 Electric Connector
Eb TX RX TX Wb RX
Ea TX RX TX
Wa RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
Eb
LINK/ACT 10/100
Wb RX TX RX D
ETHERNET
LINK/ACT 10/100 LINK/ACT 10/100 LINK/ACT 10/100 LINK/ACT 10/100
9600,N.8,1
RST
ACTIVE Eb
Wb OW
ACO
TX
CONSOLE
SNMP
OW POWER 2
MjMn Ea
Wa CO
POWER
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 3
PORT 4
Ea TX RX TX
Wa RX C
DS3/E3
POWER 1
POWER 3
TX E1/T1
PORT 1
RX
TX
PORT 2
RX
TX
PORT 3
RX
PORT 1 - 12
PORT 13 - 28
Loop-O STM1 ADM/TM

SWB WOH IP EOH IP TS2
TM
RELAY
NC COM NO
E1/T1
PORT 1 - 12
PORT 13 - 28
ALM IN
WOH OP EOH OP
TS1
1 AC power supply
(fixed/ plug-in)

(fixed/ plug-in)

(fixed/ plug-in)
-V +V
3U ETSI Shelf (Rear Panel)
Figure 2- 8 Panel View for 3U ETSI Shelf
24V 1.2A
-V +V
48V 0.4A
24
Figure 2- 9 WW Connection Panel
Figure 2- 10 RJ Connection Panel
Figure 2- 11 BNC Connection Panel
25
Chapter 2 Installation Note: Each panel comes with two 1m SCSI connection cables.
Chassis Grounding The chassis is grounded when rack mounted. However, for stand alone units or extra grounding protection for rack mounted units, a dedicated chassis ground screw and lock washer is provided. The chassis ground screw is located on the right side of rear panel. When attaching a ground wire to the chassis ground screw, please follow these instructions. Use copper grounding conductors of 18 AWG Conductors should not be of dissimilar metals. The bare conductors should be coated with anti-oxidant before crimp connections are made. Unplated connection surfaces, connectors, braided strap and bus bars must be bought to a bright finish and coated with anti-oxidant before connections are made. Listed connectors and fastening hardware must be used.
PORT 13 - 28
PORT 13 - 28
Console port can be connected via RS232 interface to a configuration device a VT100 terminal or equivalent. Pin definition and pin connection of the console port are listed in the following table. Table 2- 1 DB9S Console Port Pin Assignment Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal Data Carrier Detect Receive Data Transmit Data Unassigned Signal Ground Data Set Ready Unassigned Clear to Send Unassigned Description To DTE From DTE To DTE
To DTE To DTE
Table 2- 2 SNMP Ethernet Port Pin Number 1 2 3 6 7 8 Signal TPTX+ TPTXTPRX+ TPRXChassis GND Chassis GND Description TP Driver Output TP Receive Input
26
Table 2- 3 RJ11 Connector for OW (Order Wire) Pin Number 3 4 Tip Ring Table 2- 4 Alarm Relay Connector Pin Number 1 2 3 Signal Alarm Fuse Alarm Fuse Alarm Fuse Description Normal Close Common Normal Open Signal Signal Direction
Table 2- 5 Power Connector Pin Number 1 2 3 Signal -V +V Description -DC 24 or 48 Volts +DC Return Chassis Ground
Table 2- 6 RJ45 Connector for TS1 (Timing Source1)/ TS2 (Timing Source2) Pin Number 1 2 4 5 Signal Receive Tip Receive Ring Transmit Tip Transmit Ring Input Input Output Output Signal Direction
Table 2- 7 RJ45 Connector for ALM IN (Environment Alarm Input) Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 Alarm 4 Signal Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Signal Direction
Table 2- 8 RJ45 Connector for SWB (Switching Box) Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Signal Control Relay Output Relay Status Input Control Relay Output Relay Status Input Control Relay Output Relay Status Input Card Status (Exist or Not) Output Input Output Input Output Input Input Signal Direction
27
Table 2- 9 RJ45 Connector for EOH OP (East Overheat Output) Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal Clock Out Clock Out Data Output Data Output 8K Reference Out 8K Reference Out Signal Direction 2M output + 2M output Data output + Data output 8K output + 8K output -
Table 2- 10 RJ45 Connector for EOH IP (East Overheat Input) Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal Clock Out Clock Out Data Input Data Input 8K Reference Out 8K Reference Out Signal Direction 2M output + 2M output Data output + Data output 8K output + 8K output -
Table 2- 11 RJ45 Connector for WOH OP (West Overheat Output) Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal Clock Out Clock Out Data Output Data Output 8K Reference Out 8K Reference Out Signal Direction 2M output + 2M output Data output + Data output 8K output + 8K output -
Table 2- 12 RJ45 Connector for WOH IP (West Overheat Input) Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal Clock Out Clock Out Data Input Data Input 8K Reference Out 8K Reference Out Signal Direction 2M output + 2M output Data output + Data output 8K output + 8K output -
28
Table 2- 13 SCSI Connector for E1/ T1 Line Port Number

(PORT 1 12)
Pin Number 17 18 51 52 19 20 53 54 21 22 55 56 23 24 57 58 1 2 35 36 3 4 37 38 5 6 39 40 7 8 41 42 9 10 43 44 11 12 45 46 13 14 47 48
Signal Tx Tip Tx Ring Rx Tip Rx Ring Tx Tip Tx Ring Rx Tip Rx Ring Tx Tip Tx Ring Rx Tip Rx Ring Tx Tip Tx Ring Rx Tip Rx Ring Tx Tip Tx Ring Rx Tip Rx Ring Tx Tip Tx Ring Rx Tip Rx Ring Tx Tip Tx Ring Rx Tip Rx Ring Tx Tip Tx Ring Rx Tip Rx Ring Tx Tip Tx Ring Rx Tip Rx Ring Tx Tip Tx Ring Rx Tip Rx Ring Tx Tip Tx Ring Rx Tip Rx Ring
Pin Number 17 18 51 52 19 20 53 54 21 22 55 56 23 24 57 58 1 2 35 36 3 4 37 38 5 6 39 40 7 8 41 42 9 10 43 44 11 12 45 46 13 14 47 48
Port Number
(PORT 13 28)
13
14
15
16
21
22
23
24
25
10
26
11
27
29
Port Number
(PORT 1 12)
Pin Number 15 16 49 50
Signal Tx Tip Tx Ring Rx Tip Rx Ring Tx Tip Tx Ring Rx Tip Rx Ring Tx Tip Tx Ring Rx Tip Rx Ring Tx Tip Tx Ring Rx Tip Rx Ring Tx Tip Tx Ring Rx Tip Rx Ring
Pin Number 15 16 49 50 25 26 59 60 27 28 61 62 29 30 63 64 31 32 65 66
Port Number
(PORT 13 28)
12
28
17
18
19
20
Table 2- 14 Ethernet Port Pin Number 1 2 3 6 7 8 Signal TPTX+ TPTXTPRX+ TPRXChassis GND Chassis GND Description TP Driver Output TP Receive Input
30
Table 2- 15 DS3/ E3 Jumper Setting Port Number PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3 Jumper JP 6 JP 7 JP 8 JP 9 JP 10 JP 11 Description
ON for GND
DS3/ E3 Interface
: ON for GND : OFF
JP11
JP10
PORT 1
Figure 2- 12 Jumper Setting for DS3/ E3 Interface
JP6
JP8
JP9
JP7
PORT 2
PORT 3
31
Table 2- 16 Default Software Configuration Configuration

Baud rate Data length Stop bits Parity XON_XOFF IP address Subnet mask Gateway IP Trap IP Community (Get) Community (Set) Device name
Option
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 8-bits, 7-bits 1-bit, 2-bits NONE, EVEN, ODD XON, XOFF 9600 8-bits 1-bit NONE XOFF 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Default
Console port
Network management
SNMP System Mode MSP 1+1
HDLC Bandwidth Setup APSD Setup Lower Order Mapping Mode Ring Closure Password for ADMIN Password for Operator Priority Source Timing Source: Eas t S1byte side clock S1byte Active Priority Source Timing Source: W est S1byte side clock S1byte Active Priority Source Timing Source: S1byte External clock S1byte Active Priority Source Timing Source: S1byte Tributary clock S1byte Active Priority Source Timing Source: S1byte Internal clock S1byte Active
O9100 TM, TM1+1, 2TM, ADM, ADM1+1 OFF, ON REVERTIVE, NON-REVERTIVE BI-DIRECTIONAL, UNI-DIRECTIONAL 3 channels, 12 channels OFF, ON TU11, TU12
1st to 5th
0.0.0.0 Public Private O9100 ADM OFF NON-REVERTIVE UNI-DIRECTIONAL 3 OFF TU12 ON LOOP LOOP 2nd Ea side Invalid No 3rd W a side Valid No 4th Exte-1 0 Invalid No 5th Unit-A 0 Invalid No 1st Internal Valid Yes
Invalid, Valid No, Yes 1st to 5th
Invalid, Valid No, Yes
32
Chapter 3 Operation
3 OPERATION
This chapter describes the Loop-O9100 configuration options and operational functions. Users are encouraged to refer to this manual's chapter 5: Front Panel Operation and chapter 6: Terminal Operation for detailed operation.
3.1 Quick Start for Loop-O9100

After done the installation of Loop-O9100, users may eager to know how to use the powerful ADM/TM equipment immediately. The following sections offer users a quick start for using Loop-O9100.
3.1.1 Power On
Prepare a console cable to connect the DB9S console port of O9100 with your VT100 terminal. The VT100 terminal can be a PC running VT100 emulator software. Then turn power on after attaching power cable to a power supply of the unit.
3.1.2 Load Default

Each O9100 is shipped with factory default setting. Upon initial power up you will see your VT100 monitor shows up the following screen. The O9100 system will automatically load the hardware configuration and store it in the flash memory. If you prefer to load the factory default configuration, press ACO button of the O9100's front panel during the countdown (ie. 3.21).
';;' ;; ,, , ,, ,, , ,, ,, , , ,, , ;; ,;' ' ;, ,;' ';, ; ; ;' ' ; , ;; ,; ' '; , ,; ' ' ;, ; ; ' ;, ;; ;; ; ; ;; ;; ; ; ;; ;; , ;; ; ; ;; ;; ; ; , ;; ;; ,; ; ; ;; ;; ;; ; ; '; ,, ; ' , ; ; ,, , ,, ; ;; ' ;, , ,; ' ' ;, , ,; ' ;; ;; T e l e c o m ,; ; ,
L O O P- O 91 0 0
I n i ti a l s ys t em co n fi gu r a ti o n. . .3 . .. 2 .. . 1. ..
3.2 Logon, Logoff, and Password

O9100 system provides users to logon and logoff via terminal operation. The logoff function prevents system configuration changes at the terminal, while the logon function allows system configuration changes. The passowrd feature is used to augment lock control against unauthorized terminal users from changing system parameters via the terminal. O9100 system allows users to enable or disable the password function. If the password function is enabled, entering a correct password is required when a user logon the system. If the password function is disabled, no password is required to logon. Please note that the default setting of the password function is enabled and the default password is "LOOP". To change the default password, press "S" command from the "Main Menu". Then press "G" command from the "System Setup" sub-menu. Key in the default password (LOOP) when a prompt asking for the old password. See also chapter 6 of this manual for the detail. If the password is forgotten, the only recourse for the user is returning to the factory setting of LOOP. See also the section 3.3 for the procedure.
32
Chapter 3 Operation
3.3 Return to Default

O9100 provides two ways for user to return to default: 1. After the unit being powered on, press ACO button to load default during the system's countdown. 2. Using VT100 to load default. Press "W" command from the "Main Menu" to return to the default configuration.
3.4 Review of Default Configuration

All default configurations can be reviewed or changed via terminal operations. See also chpater 6 of this manual for the detail.
3.5 System Configuration 3.5.1 Console Port

The console port allows the user either to use a local VT-100 terminal or use a remote VT-100 terminal via modem for system configuration, diagnostics, polling status reports, etc. The console port Baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, XON_XOFF, and parity bit length are defaulted, as shown below. Table 3 - 1 Console Port Setting Item Baud Data Length Stop Bit XON_XOFF Parity Fixed Setting 9600 8-Bits 1-Bits X_OFF NONE
33
Chapter 3 Operation
3.6 Alarm
When the Loop-O9100 reports an alarm condition, such as loss of synchronization, the ALARM will cause the LED on the front panel to light. Each alarm can be individually enabled or disabled. The alarm types are listed in the table as below. Table 3 - 2 Alarm Default - for System and STM1 & HP Alarm Type Alarm Alarm cut off Power Failed Fan Failed TS Sync Loss System OM EQP OM UNEQP Unit EQP Unit UNEQP SNCP Switch MSP Switch STM1 SF/SD STM1 LOS STM1 LOF MS-AIS STM1 & HP MS-RDI AU4-LOP AU4-AIS VC4-RDI VC4-PLM VC4-LOM E1/ T1 E3/ T3 LOS LOS AIS External Alarm 1 External Alarm 2 (Environment) External Alarm 3 Alarm External Alarm 4 TS Sync Loss TU MS OM EQP OM UNEQP SF/SD External ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE Relay DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE LOF AIS AU LOM PLM RDI Option Default Severity INFORM MAJOR MAJOR MINOR INFORM INFORM INFORM INFORM MINOR MAJOR CRITICAL CRITICAL CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR MAJOR MAJOR MINOR MINOR MAJOR MAJOR MAJOR MAJOR INFORM INFORM INFORM INFORM External Alarm 1 External Alarm 2 External Alarm 3 External Alarm 4 Message
Timing source Synchronous Loss Tributary Unit Multiplex Section Optical module is equiped Optical module is un-equiped Signal Failure/ Signal Degrade
Loss of Frame Alarm Indication Siganl Administrative Unit Loss of Multi-frame Path Signal Label Mismatch Remote Detect Indication
34
Chapter 3 Operation Table 3 - 3 Alarm Default - for TU Option Default LOP TU Alarm Mask TU Alarm Relay TU Alarm Severity ENABLE DISABLE MAJOR AIS ENABLE DISABLE MAJOR RDI ENABLE DISABLE MINOR PLM ENABLE DISABLE MINOR
3.6.1 Alarm Filter Setup

Please refer to Appendix 10 for alarm trap information.
3.7 Performance Reports (per G.826)

For Optical, E1, DS1, E3, T3 and Ethernet line receiver, Loop-O9100 has the sets of performance registers. These are line and user. The line performance register tracks the line receiver performance status. The user performance register tracks the line receiver as well, but user may clear at any time. The performance parameters are listed in the following tables. Each performance parameter has ninety six sets of registers to record 24 hours history in 15 minute intervals.
Table 3 - 4 Performance Parameter List Optical

Performance Parameter
B1 (Bip-8)
BPV1 1 < BPV < 2400 BPV 2400 10 consecutive SES
B2 (Bip-24)
B3 (Bip-8)
ES BES SES UAS
Table 3 - 5 Performance Parameter List - E1

Description
Error Second Bursty Error Second Severe Error Second Unavailable Second
Definition 2-Frame/Multiframe
BPV1, OOF1, or CS1. 1 < BPV < 2048 BPV 2048, or OOF 1 10 consecutive SES
Definition 16-Frame/Multiframe
CRC 1, OOF 1, or CS 1. 1 < CRC < 805 CRC 805, or OOF 1 10 consecutive SES
ES BES SES UAS

V5 (Bip-2)
ES BES SES UAS
35
Chapter 3 Operation Table 3 - 6 Performance Parameter List - DS1

Description
Error Second Bursty Error Second Severe Error Second Unavailable Second
Definition D4
BPV1, OOF1, or CS1. 1 < BPV < 1544 BPV 2048, or OOF 1 10 consecutive SES
Definition ESF
CRC 1, OOF 1, or CS 1. 1 < CRC < 320 CRC 805, or OOF 1 10 consecutive SES
ES BES SES UAS

V5 (Bip-2)
ES BES SES UAS
Table 3 - 7 Performance Parameter List - E3/ T3

LP-B3
BPV1, OOF1 1 < BPV < 2400 10 consecutive SES 1 < BPV < 34
E3
BPV1, OOF1 1 < BPV < 44
T3
BPV1, OOF1 BPV 44, or OOF 1 10 consecutive SES
ES BES SES UAS
BPV 2400, or OOF 1 BPV 34, or OOF 1 10 consecutive SES
Table 3 - 8 Performance Parameter List - Ethernet

LP-B3
BPV1, OOF1 1 < BPV < 2400 10 consecutive SES BPV1
V5 (Bip-2)
1 < BPV < 600 10 consecutive SES
ES BES SES UAS
BPV 2400, or OOF 1 BPV 600
36
Chapter 3 Operation
Below lists the types of reports available, performance parameters provided by each report, and the reset commands for each report. Table 3 - 9 Performance Report Options Report Type [Menu Command] 1-Hour Terminal Reports Menu Option [1] 24-Hour Terminal Reports Menu Option [2] 7-Day Terminal Reports Menu Option [3] LINE [Network] N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C
Y = Report available and can be cleared by admin terminal command Y. N/C = No clear. Report available, but counts cannot be cleared by the user.
Category ES USER [Network] LINE [Network] USER [Network] LINE [Network] USER [Network] Y N/C Y N/C Y BES Y N/C Y N/C Y
Report SES Y N/C Y N/C Y UAS Y N/C Y N/C Y AS Y N/C Y N/C Y EFS Y N/C Y N/C Y
32
Chapter 3 Operation
3.8 TSA (Time Slot Assignment) Type
TSA Types for A Channel

TYPE 1: P.P.A/D (E) Path-protected Bidirectional A/D (default drop from EAST) TYPE 2: P.P.A/D (W) Path-protected Bidirectional A/D (default drop from WEST)
WaTx WbRx WEST side
EaRx EbTx EAST side WEST side
WaTx WbRx
EaRx EbTx EAST side
TYPE 3: EAST A/D Non Path-protected Bidirectional A/D from EAST
TYPE 4: WEST A/D Non Path-protected Bidirectional A/D from WEST
WaTx WbRx WEST side
WaTx WbRx
EaRx EbTx EAST side
TYPE 5: P.P. D&C (E) Path-protected D&C (default drop from EAST)
TYPE 6: P.P. D&C (W) Path-protected D&C (default drop from WEST)
WaTx WbRx WEST side
WaTx WbRx
EaRx EbTx EAST side
TYPE 7: EAST D&C Non Path-protected D&C from EAST
TYPE 8: WEST D&C Non Path-protected D&C from WEST
WaTx WbRx WEST side
WaTx WbRx
EaRx EbTx EAST side
33
Chapter 3 Operation
3.9 Expended TU11 numbering for O9100
34
Chapter 3 Operation 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Expended TU11 TUG-3(K) numbering for O9100
TUG-2(L)
TU11(M)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2
40
Chapter 3 Operation
3.10 Expended TU12 numbering for O9100
41
Chapter 3 Operation
52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Expended TU12 TUG-3(K) numbering for O9100
TUG-2(L)
TU12(M)
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1
1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3
1
2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
42
Chapter 3 Operation
3.11 LED
The front panel of the Loop-O9100 has mulit-color LEDs for operation and error indications. The indication is either off, steady on, or flickering. The following table lists each LED and its color and the meaning it represents. Note that when powering up and selftest is in progress, the unit front panel LEDs are also used to indicate fault conditions. Table 3 - 10 LED Indication for Main Unit LED POWER ACTIVE Color Off Green Off Flashing Green Power off or self-test failure Normal operation CPU fails Normal This LED is used to indicate alarm status: LOS, LOF, MS-AIS, MS-RDI, AU4-LOP, AU4-AIS, VC4-RDI, VC4-PLM, VC4-LOM, TU-LOP, TU-RDI, TU-PLM, and E1/T1 LOS (only when TSA is assigned) MjMn Off Red Amber Green Off Ea Green Red Amber Off Eb Green Red Amber Off Wa Green Red Amber Off Wb Green Red Amber OW CO ACO Off Green Off Green Off Red Alarm is disabled Critical alarm message or Major alarm message occurs Minor alarm message occurs Normal, information occurs This LED is used to indicate the status of 1st east-side trunk module Trunk module is not installed or not be used by a selected system mode Normal Loss of frame (LOF) or Loss of signal (LOS) Alarm indication signal (AIS) or Remote defect indication (RDI) This LED is used to indicate the status of 2nd east-side trunk module Trunk module is not installed or not be used by a selected system mode Normal Loss of frame (LOF) or Loss of signal (LOS) Alarm indication signal (AIS) or Remote defect indication (RDI) This LED is used to indicate the status of 1st west-side trunk module Trunk module is not installed or not be used by a selected system mode Normal Loss of frame (LOF) or Loss of signal (LOS) Alarm indication signal (AIS) or Remote defect indication (RDI) This LED is used to indicate the status of 2nd west-side trunk module Trunk module is not installed or not be used by a selected system mode Normal Loss of frame (LOF) or Loss of signal (LOS) Alarm indication signal (AIS) or Remote defect indication (RDI) Order Wire is not installed Order Wire is installed Ring clourse is not installed Ring clourse is installed Normal Alarm occurs (For any alarm type) Indication
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3 - 11 LED Indications for System Mode System Mode TM (E) TM (W) TM 1+1 2TM 2TM 1+1 ADM ADM 1+1 LED Ea ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON Eb OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Wa OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON Wb OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON
* ON = The LED color could be green, red, or amber.
Note: On the front panel of the 1U Loop-O9100 device you will see the following LED display:
Figure 3- 1 Loop- O9100 1U Led Panel Under normal circumstances Ea represents the path to and from the East, and Wa/Eb represents the path to and from the west. When 1+1 protection is used, both paths go to and from the East. For example, with 1+1 protection, Ea becomes the primary path to and from the east and Wa/Eb becomes the secondary (backup) path to and from the East. . Table 3 - 12 LED Indication for Plug-in Module Single LED Color Indication This LED is used to indicate the alarm status of E1/T1 plug-in module: TU-LOP, TU-AIS, TU-RDI, TU-PLM, and E1/T1 LOS (only when TSA assigned) Locked Critical alarm message or Major alarm message occurs Minor alarm message occurs Normal or Information occurs This LED is used to indicate the alarm status of E3/T3 plug-in module:
TU3-LOP, TU3-AIS, TU3-RDI, TU3-PLM, E3/T3 Line AIS, and E3/T3 Line LOS
for E1/T1
Off Red Amber Green
for E3/T3
Off Red Amber Green Off Red Amber Green
for Ethernet
(only when TSA assigned). Locked Critical alarm message or Major alarm message occurs Minor alarm message occurs Normal or Information occurs This LED is used to indicate the alarm status of Ethernet plug-in module: TU-LOP, TU-AIS, TU-RDI, and TU-PLM (only when TSA assigned) Locked Critical alarm message or Major alarm message occurs Minor alarm message occurs Normal or Information occurs
44
Chapter 3 Operation
3.12 SDH Multiplexing Structure (per G.707)
3.13 New SONET/SDH at the edge
Edge
Adaptation
Core
Ethernet
GFP Native Interfaces Generic Frame Procedure LAPS

45
VC Virtual Concatenation \
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme MUX/DEMUX

SONET/ SDH
Ficon
Escon
Fiber Channel
Chapter 3 Operation
3.13.1
GFP (Generic Framing Procedure G.7041)
GFP supports the rate adaptation between frame/ packet based traffic and synchronous traffic.
Standardized GFP Frames

PLI Control frames PLI = 01 to 03 hex PLI = 00 max PTI=00 bin Client data frames 03 hex PLI 04 max
GFP Idle Frame

Octet Transmission Order 1 2 3 4 1 Octets Bits 2 00 (B6) hex 00 (AB) hex 00 (31) hex 00 (E0) hex 3 4 5 6
Client frames PTI=100 bin Client management frames
Bit Transmission Order
Other (for future study)
Idle frames
46
Chapter 3 Operation
GFP Frames
Octet Transmission Order
16-bit Payload Length Indicator cHEC (CRC-16)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9-66 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +n +n+1 +n+2 +n+3 +n+4 1 Octets Bits
PTI
PLI PLI cHEC cHEC PFI UPI tHEC Extension Header eHEC
2 Core Header 2 EXI 2 Payload Header 2 0-58 2 Extension Header (Optional)
Payload Headers (4 to bytes)
Client Payload Information Field
n Payload Area
Optional Payload FCS (CRC-32)
pFCS pFCS pFCS pFCS 4 5
4 FCS (Optional) 6 7 8
PLI (PDU Length Indicator) Field The 2-octet PLI field: A binary number representing the number of octets in the GFP payload area. Minimum value of the PLI field in a GFP client frame is 4 octets. cHEC (Core HEC) Field The 2-octet core header error control field: CRC-16 error control code protecting the integrity of the contents of the core header by enabling both single-bit error correction and multi-bit error detection. PTI (Payload Type Identifier) Field A 3-bit subfield identifing the type of GFP client frame. GFP Client Management Frame User Payload Identifier PTI=100 UPI value 0000 0000 and 1111 1111 0000 0001 0000 0010 0000 0011 through 1111 1110 Reserved Client signal fail (loss of client signal) Client signal fail (loss of character synchronization) reserved for future use Usage
47
Chapter 3 Operation PFI (Payload FCS Indicator) A 1-bit subfield indicating the presence or absence of the payload FCS (Frame Check Sequence) field. When PFI = 1, FCS is on; PFI = 0, FCS is off. UPI (User Payload Identifier) An 8-bit field identifying the type of payload conveyed in the GFP payload information field.
PTI = 000 User payload identifier (binary) 0000 0000 1111 1111 0000 0001 0000 0010 0000 0011 0000 0100 0000 0101 0000 0110 0000 0111 0000 1001 0000 1001 0000 1010 0000 1001 through 1110 1111 1111 0000 through 1111 1110 GFP frame payload area Reserved and note available Frame-mapped Ethernet Frame-mapped PPP Transparent Fiber Channel Transparent FICON Transparent ESCON Transparent Gb Ethernet Reserved for future Frame-mapped multiple access protocol over SDH (MAPOS) Transparent DVB ASI Frame-mapped IEEE 802.17 RESILIENT PACKET RING Reserved for future standardization Reserved for proprietary use
tHEC (Type HEC) Field The 2-octet type header error control field contains a CRC-16 error control code that protects the integrity of the contents of the type field. EXI (Extension Header Identifier) A 4-bit subfield of the type field identifying the type of extension header. GFP Extension Header Identifiers Extension header identifiers type bits 0000 0001 0010 Others Linear frame Ring frame Reserved Usage Null extension header
48
Chapter 3 Operation Null Extension Header This extension header applies to a logical point-to-point configuraion, where the transport path is dedicated to one client signal.
Octet Transmission Order 5 6 7 8 1 Octets Bits 2 3 Type Type tHEC tHEC 4 5
Linear Extension Header CID (Channel ID) Field: The CID is an 8-bit binary number used to indicate one of 256 communication channels at a GFP termination point. Spare Field: The 8-bit spare field, reserved for future use. eHEC (Extension HEC) Field: CRC-16 error control code that protects the integrity of the contents of the extension headers.
Octet Transmission Order
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
Type Type tHEC tHEC CID Spare eHEC eHEC 4 5
Octets Bits
49
Chapter 3 Operation
3.13.2
VC (Virtual Concatenation)
VC supports the efficient use of transport capacity.
High-order VC-3/ 4, STS-1/ 3c

Frame counter (MFI): A combination of the first multiframe and the second multiframe
Low-order VC-11/12, VT-1.5/ 2

Frame counter (MFI): Multiframe counter MFI = 0 -31 Sequence indicator (SQ): Number to identify each mumber in the VCG SQ = 0 - 63
VC
MFI = 0 - 4095 Sequence indicator (SQ): Number to identify each member in the VCG SQ = 0 - 255
3.13.3
LCAS (Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme)
LCAS enables the hitless bandwidth provisioning.
High-order VC-3/ 4, STS-1/ 3c

Member Status (MST):
Low-order VC-11/12, VT-1.5/ 2

Member Status (MST):
LCAS
The status of all members (256) is transferred in 64 ms. The status of all members (64) is transferred in 128 ms. MST = 0, Link OK MST = 0, Link OK MST = 1, Link Fail MST = 1, Link Fail
LCAS Communication is uni-directional

CRC GID CTRL MFI SQ Source to Sink Communication Source Sink to Source Communication RS-Ack MST Sink
GID : Group identification bit, 1 bit identical for all members of the VCG in the multiframe. The content is given 15 by a PRBS 2 -1. RS-Ack : Re-sequence acknowledge bit. Toggling value between 0 1 and 1 0.
50
Chapter 3 Operation
Example for ADD command

NMS Add Cmnd LCAS So mem n-1 (EOS) Sk mem a (new) Sk mem a+1 (new) Sk
CTRL=ADD CTRL=ADD connectivity check
MST=OK
CTRL=NORM
CTRL=EOS
RS-Ack inverted
MST=OK
CTRL=EOS
CTRL=NORM
RS-Ack inverted
ADD multiple members
LCAS CTRL words Value msb lsb 0000 0001 0010 0011 0101 1111 Command FIXED ADD NOR EOS IDLE DNU non-LCAS mode This member is about to be added to the group Normal transmission End of sequence indication and normal transmission This member is not part of the group or about to be removed Do not use (the payload) the Sk side reported FAIL status Remarks
At initiation of a VCG source all members shall send CTRL = IDLE.
51
Chapter 3 Operation
3.14 Overview of GARP (Generic Attribute Registration Protocol)

The purpose of the Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) is to provide a generic framework whereby devices in a bridged LAN, e.g. end stations and switches, can register and de-register attribute values, such as VLAN Identifiers, with each other. In doing so, the attributes are propagated to devices in the bridged LAN, and these devices form a reachability tree that is a subset of an active topology. For a bridged LAN, the active topology is normally that created and maintained by the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). (STP) Spanning-Tree Protocol. Bridge protocol that uses the spanning-tree algorithm, enabling a learning bridge to dynamically work around loops in a network topology by creating a spanning tree. Bridges exchange BPDU messages with other bridges to detect loops, and then remove the loops by shutting down selected bridge interfaces. Refers to both the IEEE 802.1 Spanning-Tree Protocol standard and the earlier Digital Equipment Corporation Spanning-Tree Protocol upon which it is based. The IEEE version supports bridge domains and allows the bridge to construct a loop-free topology across an extended LAN. The IEEE version generally is preferred over the Digital version. Sometimes abbreviated as STP. GARP defines the architecture, rules of operation, state machines and variables for the registration and de-registration of attribute values. By itself, GARP is not directly used by devices in a bridged LAN. It is the applications of GARP that specify what the attribute represents and so perform meaningful actions. The GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) application distributes dynamic filter entries for VLAN membership among the Forwarding Databases of VLAN-aware switches. A GARP Participant in a switch or an end station consists of a GARP application component, and a GARP Information Declaration (GID) component associated with each port of the switch. One such GARP Participant exists per port, per GARP Application. The propagation of information between GARP Participants for the same Application in a switch is carried out by the GARP Information Propagation (GIP) component. Protocol exchanges take place between GARP Participants by means of LLC Type 1 services, using the group MAC address and PDU (Protocol Description Unit) format defined for the GARP Application concerned. Every instance of a GARP application includes a database to store the values of the attributes. Within GARP, attributes are mapped to GID indexes. The architecture of GARP is shown in the following figure.
Figure 3- 2 Achitecture of GARP
52
Chapter 3 Operation The GARP Application component of the GARP Participant is responsible for defining the semantics associated with the parameter values and operators received in GARP PDUs, and for generating GARP PDUs for transmission. The Application makes use of the GID component, and the state machines associated with the operation of GID, in order to control its protocol interactions. An instance of GID consists of the set of state machines that define the current registration and declaration state of all attribute values associated with the GARP Participant. Separate state machines exist for the Applicant and Registrar. This is shown in Figure 3-2.
Figure 3- 3 Architecture of GID GARP registers and de-registers attribute values through GARP messages sent at the GID level. A GARP Participant that wishes to make a declaration (an Applicant registering an attribute value) sends a JoinIn or JoinEmpty message. An Applicant that wishes to withdraw a declaration (de-registering an attribute value) sends a LeaveEmpty or LeaveIn message. Following the de-registration of an attribute value, the Applicant will send a number of Empty messages. The purpose of the Empty message is to prompt other Applicants to send JoinIn/JoinEmpty messages. For the GARP protocol to be resilient against multiple lost messages, a LeaveAll message is available. Timers are used in the state machines to generate events and control state transitions. The jobs of the Applicant are: to ensure that this Participants declarations are registered by other Participants Registrars to ensure that other Participants have a chance to re-declare (rejoin) after anyone withdraws a declaration (leaves). The Applicant is therefore looking after the interests of all would-be Participants. This allows the Registrar to be very simple. The job of the Registrar is to record whether an attribute is registered, in the process of being de-registered, or is not registered for an instance of GID. To control the Applicant state machine, an Applicant Administrative Control parameter is provided. This parameter determines whether or not the Applicant state machine participates in GARP protocol exchanges. The default value is to have the Applicant participating in the exchanges.
53
Chapter 3 Operation To control the Registrar state machine, a Registrar Administrative Control parameter is provided. Basically this parameter determines whether or not the Registrar state machine listens to incoming GARP messages. The default value is to have the Registrar listening to incoming GARP messages. The propagation of information between GARP Participants for the same Application in a switch is carried out by the GIP component. The operation of GIP is dependent upon STP being enabled on a port, as only ports in the STP Forwarding state are eligible for membership to the GIP connected ring. Ports in the GIP connected ring propagate GID Join and Leave requests to notify each other of attribute registrations and de-registrations. The operation of GIP allows ports in the switch to share information between themselves and the LANs/end stations to which the ports are connected. If a port enters the STP Forwarding state and the GARP application that the port belongs to is enabled, then the port will be added to the GIP connected ring for the GARP application. All attributes registered by other ports in the GIP connected ring will be propagated to the recently connected port. All attributes registered by the recently connected port will be propagated to all other ports in the GIP connected ring. Similarly, if a port leaves the STP Forwarding state and the GARP application that the port belongs to is enabled, then the port will be removed from the GIP connected ring for the GARP application. Prior to removal, GID leave requests will be propagated to all other ports in the GIP connected ring if the port to be removed has previously registered an attribute and no other port in the GIP connected ring has registered that attribute. The operations of GIP can be enabled or disabled by user command.
3.15 Overview of GVRP (Generic VLAN Attribute Registration Protocol)

The Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) allows a LAN device to signal other neighboring devices that it wishes to receive packets for one or more VLANs. The main purpose of GVRP is to allow switches to automatically discover some of the VLAN information that would otherwise have to be manually configured in each switch. This is achieved by using GARP to propagate VLAN Identifier attributes across a bridged LAN.
Figure 3- 4 Network Example using GVRP
Figure 3-3 shows a network example using GVRP. Switches A, B and C are VLAN-aware. Switch B has not been configured to route packets between Switches A and C.
54
Chapter 3 Operation Without GVRP operating, end stations PC1 and PC2 can communicate to each other only if a network administrator has configured ports 1 and 2 on Switch B to be in the same VLAN. For a large network, such manual configuration would be required on all switches with the correct allocation of ports into VLANs on all switches. By enabling GVRP on Switches A, B and C, the Sales VLAN Identifier (42) will be propagated to Switch B on ports 1 and 2. These ports will register the VLAN Identifier attribute and a VLAN named gvrp42 with VLAN Identifier 42 will be created on Switch B. Ports 1 and 2 on Switch B will be added into the gvrp42 VLAN as tagged ports. Thus, Switch B is now able to forward Sales VLAN traffic from Switch A to Switch C and vice-versa, and end stations PC1 and PC2 can communicate to each other. GVRP creates dynamic VLANs in switches that do not already have a VLAN with the VLAN Identifier propagated by GARP. These VLANs cannot be destroyed by the user using the DESTROY VLAN command. Ports assigned to the dynamic VLANs cannot be modified by the user. Static VLAN attribute registrations and de-registrations occur every time a port is added to or deleted from a VLAN, or a VLAN is added to or deleted from an STP. Dynamic VLAN attribute registrations and de-registrations are triggered by receiving GARP PDUs and by the timeout of the LeaveAll timer.
3.16 GARP Timers 3.16.1 Join Time
The JOINTIME parameter sets the duration of the Join Period timer for the GARP applications in centiseconds. The timer is used to control the interval between opportunities to transmit GARP PDUs. Each port in the GARP application has a Join Period timer. The default value for this parameter is 20 centiseconds (i.e. 0.2 seconds). The jointimer is a timer used by GARP to control the frequency of opportunities for the Switch to transmit a PDU. When two join messages are sent, the second message is sent after a Join time interval (200 ms).
3.16.2
Leave Time
The LEAVETIME parameter sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for the GARP applications in centiseconds. The timer controls the period of time that the Registrar state machine will wait in the LV (Leave) state before entering the MT(empty) state, i.e. how quickly a Registrar will de-register an attribute from the registered IN state. Each port in the GARP application has a single Leave Period timer. Although a Leave Period timer is strictly required on a per attribute basis, this implementation of GARP uses a Leave Timer that expires four times to timeout the LEAVETIME period. This granularity allows multiple Leave Period durations to be timed out using a single timer on each port belonging to the GARP application. The default value for this parameter is 60 centiseconds (i.e. 0.6 seconds).
55
Chapter 3 Operation
3.16.3
LeaveAll Time
The LEAVEALLTIME parameter sets the duration of the LeaveAll Period timer for the GARP application in centiseconds. The timer controls the frequency with which the LeaveAll state machine generates a LeaveAll message in a GARP PDU. Each port in the GARP application has a LeaveAll timer. The default value for this parameter is 1000 centiseconds (i.e. 10 seconds). The leavealltimer is a timer used by GARP to control the frequency of generated LeaveAll messages. A GARP compliant device shall transmit a LeaveAll message upon the expiry of the leavealltimer. The LeaveAll state machine is used to constantly refresh the registrations by prompting declarations from the participants. This state machine uses LeaveAll timer. At every LeaveAll timer period (10 seconds) a LeaveAll message is generated which triggers the appropriate participants to declare their attributes with Join messages.
3.16.4
Relationships Between Timers
The Join Period, Leave Period and LeaveAll Period durations are interrelated. There are two criterias for setting the timers: (1) LEAVETIME >= JOINTIME * 3, derived from IEEE standard 802.1D, and (2) LEAVEALLTIME > LEAVETIME, which states that the LeaveAll Period must be significantly greater than the Leave Period, as per the IEEE standard. Note The LeaveAll Time period should satisfy the following criteria LEAVEALLTIME > LEAVETIME
3.17 Spanning Tree (STP/ RSTP) Setup

The Spanning Tree Algorithm can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between bridges. This allows the device to interact with other bridging devices (that is, an STP/RSTP-compliant switch or bridge) in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down. The spanning tree algorithms supported by this device include these versions: STP Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D) RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w) Spanning tree algorithm uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device that serves as the root of the spanning tree network. It selects a root port on each bridging device (except for the root device) which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device. Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN, which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device. All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports. After determining the lowest cost spanning tree, it enables all root ports and designated ports, and disables all other ports. Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports, eliminating any possible network loops. Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the Root Bridge. If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval (Maximum Age), the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down. This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network topology. RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower, legacy STP. RSTP achieves must faster reconfiguration (i.e., around one tenth of the time required by STP) when a node or port fails.
56
Chapter 3 Operation
3.18 System Timing Sources
O9100 West STM-1 Line Clock (SSM) East STM-1 Line clock (SSM)
Internal
External Timing (Fixed Clock Quality Setting)
1 out of 4 Tributary Clocks (Fixed Clock Quality Setting)
Figure 3- 5 Timing Inputs of O9100
As illustrated in Figure 3- 4, the timing sources for O9100 ADM/TM are internal clock, East STM-1 Line clock, West STM-1 Line clock, 2* External Clocks, and 4*Tributary clocks. Only one out of two External Clocks will be selected as the timing source. Similarly, only one out of 4 tributary clocks can be selected as the timing source. Per G.811, the clock quality can be distributed to and derived from the East STM-1 Line and West STM-1 Line by using SSM (Synchronization Status Message) over S1 byte. The SSM message is carried over S1 bytes on the two STM-1 aggregate lines. For External Timing interfaces and Tributary Timing interfaces, the SSM messaging of clock quality is not supported. Instead, the clock quality of External Timing and Tributary Timing are user configurable and static once set. In summary, the clock sources with SSM support (East STM-1 Line & West STM-1 Line) are defined as Dynamic-Quality Clock Group. While the clock sources (External timing, Tributary timing, & Internal timing) with fixed clock quality are defined as Fixed-Quality Clock Group Optionally, the system can be dynamically locked to a clock source based on the quality, either of dynamic or of fixed type, of the enabled clock sources. In addition to clock quality, the O9100 accept user programmable priority setting for each clock input. Optionally, the O9100 can also do clock selection strictly based on the Priority set by the user. In summary, there are 3 clock selection modes supported on O9100. They are listed below. Strictly Priority Based Revertive Strictly Priority Based Nonrevertive SSM + Priority SSM mode denoted as Revertive mode Denoted as Non-Revertive mode
If Revertive is chosen as the clock selection mode, then the system clock selection will be strictly based on the availability and priority of each interface. When a valid clock with the highest priority among the available clocks, then it will be chosen. The clock quality will be ignored in this mode. Obviously, Revertive
57
Chapter 3 Operation means the clock source will be switch back to the interface of higher priority when its recovered from failure. If all the clock inputs become unavailable, then the system will enter Clock Hold-over mode. If Non-Revertive is chosen as the clock selection mode, then the behavior will be exactly the same as Revertive mode, except the switch back activity, described above. Even though a clock input with higher priority is recovered from failure, the system clock source will NOT be switch from existing locked source with lower priority to the higher one. If the SSM clock mode is chosen, then the clock source selection decision will be based on the SSM clock quality received from East and West STM-1 lines. 1 the clock quality of the clock source with highest priority, if any, within the 2 Fixed-Quality Clock Group The O9100 system will be locked to the clock input with higher clock quality (lower value). Note: "Hold-over" means that when clock loss occurs, the PLL (Phase Lock Loop) will synchronize clock phases so no data glitches occur during clock reference switchover from primary to secondary or vise versa.
58
Chapter 4 Maintenance
4 MAINTENANCE
4.1 Self-Test
When the Loop-O9100 is powered up, a complete self-test routine is run to check all I/O ports, read/write memory, and data paths to validate system integrity. During system self test, "TESTING" message and testing code are shown on the VT100 terminal screen. If any error is found, a testing code is shown on the VT100 terminal display. Various system diagnostic methodologies can be found in the following paragraphs.
4.2 Diagnostics
O9100 support 15-bit register PRBS (Pseudo-Random Bit Sequence 2 -1) pattern and 20-bit register PRBS 20 (Pseudo-Random Bit Sequence 2 -1) pattern. The PRBS test pattern is used to test local O9100 system integrity by local loopback test. It can also be used to measure the E1 line quality. The diagnostics scenario is as follows: 1. First, make sure remote loopback of remote facility is ready. 2. Then, choose a desired E1 port and direction to send PRBS pattern. 3. Finally, select test pattern type: 2 -1 or 2
15 20 15
-1.
When the PRBS pattern sync is found, a bit error counter tracks total bit errors. It is advised to send PRBS for more than 15 minutes interval to evaluate the quality of loop condition and facility reliability. User may also read performance report from VT100 to understand the type of error.
4.3 Near End Loopback

The near end loopbacks such as analogic local loopback, digital local loopback, and line loopback are activated by the Loop-O9100. The loopbacks are at the near end facility. The following paragraph describes each loopback in detail.
4.3.1 Optical Line Loopback

Line loopback is illustrated in Figure 4-1. The incoming optical line signal is loopback to the outgoing optical signal before the optical mapper. This loopback is used to isolate the local equipment from a troubled optical transmission line. Line loopback test can be activated from the terminal.
4.3.2 Optical Local Loopback

Optical local loopback is illustrated in Figure 4-1. The outgoing optical signal is looped back through the optical PCM transceiver. All its channels are looped back to the receiver path. This loopback test is activated by the test command.
4.3.3 Optical Payload Loopback

Payload loopback is illustrated in Figure 4-1. The incoming signal is loopback to the outgoing line signal after the optical mapper. This loopback is used to isolate the TSI from the troubled transmission line. Payload loopback test can be activated from the front panel and terminal.
4.3.4 E1/T1 Line Loopback

E1/T1 Line loopback is illustrated in Figure 4-1. The incoming E1/T1 line signal is loopback to the outgoing E1/T1signal before the E1/T1 transceiver framer. This loopback is used to isolate the local equipment from a troubled E1/T1 transmission line. Line loopback test can be activated from the terminal.
64
Chapter 4 Maintenance
4.3.5 E1/T1 Local Loopback

E1/T1 Local loopback is illustrated in Figure 4-1. The outgoing signal is looped back through the E1/T1 PCM transceiver. All channels are looped back to the receiver path. This loopback test is activated by the Test command. This loopback test can be used with the PRBS diagnostic test pattern to validate the local O9100 integrity. The local loopback test can be activated from the front panel and terminal.
For E1 / T1 : Optcial Mux

1 2 3 4 5
1 . . .
28
1 2
Optical Line Loopback Optical Local Loopback
3 4 5
Optical Payload Loopback E1/T1 Local Loopback E1/T1 Line Loopback
For E3 / T3 : Optcial Mux

1 2 3 4 5
1 2
3 4 5
Optical Payload Loopback E3 / T 3 Local Loopback E3 / T 3 Line Loopback
For Ethernet : Optcial Mux

1 2 3 4 5
1 2
3 4 5
Optical Payload Loopback Ethernet Local Loopback Ethernet Line Loopback
Figure 4- 1 Loopback Block Diagram
65
Chapter 5 Front Panel Operation
5 FRONT PANEL OPERATION

This version is for O9100 without LCD option. The LCD operation is available only when the LCD option is purchased.
66
Chapter 6 Terminal Operation
6 TERMINAL OPERATION
Loop-O9100 provides comprehensive and enhanced configuration and test capability through the console port. A VT-100 type terminal or a modem can be connected to the console port on the front of the Loop-O9100. By use of single-character commands and arrow keys, the Loop-O9100 can be configured and tested. The single-character commands are not case sensitive. On each screen, the available commands and the configurable fields are highlighted. When the Loop-O9100 is powered on, the screen will show as below. Then key in a username and password to enter into the "Controller Menu". There are two usernames for user to log on the system. The authority for ADMIN and username, specified by user, are different. By using ADMIN, user can view and modify system configuration. By using specified USERNAME, user can view the current configuration only. Default passwords for ADMIN and specified USERNAME are same: LOOP. To change password, press "S" from the "Controller Menu", then press "G" from the "System Configuration Setup"sub-menu. See also the following sections for the detail.
O 9 1 00
== = C o nt r ol l er M e n u = ==
0 1: 05 : 0 2 0 4/ 2 9/ 2 00 4
S e r ia l N u mb e r : -1 43 7 2 26 4 11 H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: A S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: [ D I SP L AY ]
Co n ne c t P or t : S UP V_ P O RT S ta r t T i me : 00 : 35 : 40 0 4 / 29 / 20 0 4
[ SE T U P]
[ L O G] F - > L og Of f O - > L og On
[ MI S C ]
U S E RN A ME : AD M IN
P AS S WO R D: X XX X
> > S PA C E b ar to re f re sh o r e nt e r a c o mm a nd = = = >
Controller Menu for O9100 without CO (Ring Closure) option:

O 9 1 00 == = C o nt r ol l er M e n u = == 2 2: 35 : 1 6 0 2/ 0 6/ 2 00 6 S e r ia l N u mb e r : 37 1 H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: C S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: V2 .0 5 . 01 02 / 06 / 20 0 6 [ D I SP L AY ] C - > C on f ig Di s pl a y N - > T SA Se t ti n g D is pl a y Q - > A la r m H is t or y A - > C ur r en t A l ar m S ta t u s I - > S ys t em In f or m at io n P - > S TM Pe r fo r ma n ce C on n e ct Po r t: SU P V_ P OR T S ta r t T i me : 22 : 31 : 56 0 2 / 06 / 20 0 6
[ SE T U P] S - > Co n fi g S e tu p T - > TS A C o nf i g M - > Al a rm Se t up V - > St o re / Re t ri e ve Ba ck u p C o nf i g L - > Fi l e T ra n sf e r G - > Lo o pb a ck Se t up R - > Pe r fo r ma n ce Se t up /C l e ar E - > Un i t I ni t /C l ea r [ MI S C ] Y - > Al a rm Cu t O f f Z - > Sy s te m R e se t X - > Cl e ar Al a rm Hi s to ry W - > Re t ur n t o D e fa u lt
[ L O G] F - > L og Of f O - > L og On U - > C ho o se a U ni t
67
Controller Menu for O9100 with CO (Ring Closure) option:

O 9 1 00 - CO == = C o nt r ol l er M e n u = == 1 0: 34 : 1 4 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 S e r ia l N u mb e r : 03 80 0 4 H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: A S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: S1 .N 1 09 / 01 / 20 0 4 [ D I SP L AY ] C - > C on f ig Di s pl a y N - > T SA Se t ti n g D is pl a y Q - > A la r m H is t or y A - > C ur r en t A l ar m S ta t u s I - > S ys t em In f or m at io n P - > S TM Pe r fo r ma n ce C on n e ct Po r t: SU P V_ P OR T S ta r t T i me : 11 : 50 : 44 0 9 / 02 / 20 0 4
[ SE T U P] S - > Co n fi g S e tu p T - > TS A M o di f y M - > Al a rm Se t up V - > St o re / Re t ri e ve Ba ck u p C o nf i g L - > Fi l e T ra n sf e r G - > Lo o pb a ck Se t up R - > Pe r fo r ma n ce Se t up /C l e ar E - > Un i t I ni t /C l ea r [ MI S C ] Y - > Al a rm Cu t O f f Z - > Sy s te m R e se t X - > Cl e ar Al a rm Hi s to ry W - > Re t ur n t o D e fa u lt
6.1 Configuratin Display

To view the system configuration, press "C" from the Controller Menu. The screen will show as below.
O 9 1 00 = = = S y st e m C on f ig u ra ti o n D i sp l ay == = 1 5: 29 : 3 1 0 9/ 0 1/ 2 00 4
A B C D E F
-> -> -> -> -> ->
S y st e m C on fi g u ra t io n T i mi n g S ou rc e m i sc . S T M- 1 C o nf i g S y st e m M od e P r ot e ct i on B r id g e I nf o D i sp l ay
< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n M en u o r e n te r a co m ma n d > >
68
6.1.1 System Configuration Display

Press A from the System Configuration Display submenu to display the system configuration, then the screen will show as below.
O 9 1 00 - CO [ S y st e m] T i m e/ D at e : I P Ad d re s s : S u b ne t M a sk : T r a p I P A dd r es s : : : : D e v ic e N a me : S y s te m L o ca t io n : = = = S ys t em Co nf i g ur a ti o n = == 0 9 : 50 : 54 04 / 14 / 20 0 4
0 9: 50 : 5 4 0 4/ 1 4/ 2 00 4 1 92 .1 6 8 .1 0 0. 2 41 2 55 .2 5 5 .2 5 5. 0 00 G at e w ay IP : 19 2 .1 68 . 1 00 . 25 4 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 C om m u ni t y( G et ) : pu b li c 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 C om m u ni t y( S et ) : x 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 O 91 00 8 F, N o . 8 H si n A n n R d. S ci en c e -B a se d I n du s tr i al P a r k H si nc h u , 3 00 7 7 T ai w an F ax : +8 8 6- 3 -5 7 87 69 5
S y s te m C o nt a ct : N am e: F A E Te l :+ 8 86 - 3- 5 78 76 9 6 E -m ai l : FA E @l o op . co m .t w
[ C O NS O LE po r t] B a u d R at e : 9 60 0 D a t a L en g th : 8 -B it s S to p Bi t : 1- B it P a r it y : N ON E X ON _ X OF F : XO F F < < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>
6.1.2 Timing Source Display

Press B from the System Configuration Display submenu to display the timing source, then the screen will show as below.
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = T im i ng So ur c e = = = 1 0: 16 : 2 6 0 4/ 1 4/ 2 00 4
C l o ck
M o de
: No n- r e ve r ti v e
E a s t s id e W e s t s id e E x t er n al T r i bu t ar y I n t er n al
c l oc k c l oc k c l oc k c l oc k c l oc k
: : : : :
Pr i o ri t y 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 1st
So u rc e Ea si d e Wa si d e Ex t e- 1 Un i t- A In t er n al
S 1b y te
0 0
S t at u s I n va l id V a li d I n va l id I n va l id V a li d
Ac t iv e No No No No Y es
< < Pr e ss An y k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n M en u > >
69
6.1.3 MISC. STM-1 Configuration Display

Press C from the System Configuration Display submenu to display MISC. STIM-1 configuration, then use arrow key to switch combus option, East Side or West Side.
O 9 1 00 = == mi s c. ST M -1 Co nf i g D i sp l ay == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , E N TE R K E Y: IT E M SE L E CT C o m bu s S e le c ti o n : E as t Si d e 0 1: 3 5 :0 8 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04
< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >
Press ENTER from the above m enu to display the detail configuration, as below screen shows.
O 9 1 00 = == mi s c. ST M -1 Co nf i g D i sp l ay == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , E N TE R K E Y: IT E M SE L E CT C o m bu s S e le c ti o n : E as t Si d e J 0 _L E N E x pe c te d _J 0 _M S G T X _J 0 _M S G J 1 _L E N E x pe c te d _J 1 _M S G T X _J 1 _M S G : : : : : : 16 L oo p L oo p 16 L oo p L oo p 0 1: 3 5 :0 8 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04
HP - EP S L : 2 ( T UG )
Note: LEN(length), MSG(message), HP-EPSL(High Path-Expected Path Signal Label)
70
6.1.4 System Mode Display

Press D from the System Configuration Display subm enu to display s ystem mode, as below screen shows.
O 9 1 00 - CO = == Sy s te m M o de = = = 1 0 :2 0: 4 9 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04
S y s te m M o de : A DM
< < Pr e ss an y k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >
6.1.5 Protection Display

Press E from the System Configuration Display subm enu to display protection setting.
O 9 1 00 - CO == = P r ot e ct io n == = 1 0: 25 : 2 3 0 4/ 1 4/ 2 00 4
S N CP
r e ve r ti ve R E VE R TI VE E a st OFF W es t O FF r e ve r ti v e N O N- R EV E RT I VE di r e ct i on a l UN I - DI R EC T IO N AL
MS P 1+ 1 :
71
6.1.6 Bridge Information Display

Press F from the Sys tem Configuration Display subm enu to display detail Bridge inform ation.
O 9 1 00 = = = B ri d ge In f o Di s p la y = = = 1 0: 09 : 2 7 1 0/ 0 4/ 2 00 5
D e s ig n at e d R oo t D e s ig n at e d R oo t D e s ig n at e d R oo t D e s ig n at e d R oo t R o o t M ax Ag e :
M A C AD D R : 0 0 :5 0 :c 6 :0 0 :9 4: 8 4 P r io ri t y : 3 2 76 8 C o st : 0 P o rt : 0 20 s e c He l lo Ti m e : 2 s ec 0 0 :5 0 :c 6 :0 0 :9 4: 8 4 3 2 76 8 He l lo Ti m e : 2 s ec
Fo r wa r d D el ay :
1 5 s ec
B r i dg e I D M A C A DD R : B r i dg e I D P r io r it y : B r i dg e M a x A ge : 20 s e c A g i ng ti m e : 3 00 s e c Port ---fec west east R ol e - -- D sg D sg D sg S ta t e - -- - Fw d Fw d Fw d C os t - -- 0 19 0 19 0 19
1 5 s ec
P r io Ed g -p - - -- -- - -128 No 128 No 128 No
P- P -- No Ye s Ye s
Note: Dsg(designate), Alt(alternate), Fwd(forwarding),Lrn(learning), Dis(disable), Prio(priority), Edg-p(edge-port),p-p(point to point), fec(fast ethernet), Blk(blocking)
6.2 TSA Setting Display

Press "N" from the Controller Menu to display TSA setting, then the following screen will show up. NOTE: P.P.A/D(W)means Path Protect Add/ Drop (West Side); P.P.A/D(E)means Path Protect Add/ Drop (East Side).
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = T SA Se t ti n g Di s p la y = = = 1 0: 44 : 1 6 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4 T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct U n it :A - - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -m a p1 -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - - -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- m ap 2 -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -E 1 # T U 12 t y pe E 1# T U1 2 t yp e E 1# T U1 2 t yp e E 1# T U 1 2 ty p e 01 . 15 . 01 . 15 . 0 2 0 2 P .P . A/ D (W ) 1 6 . 02 . 16 . 03 . 17 . 03 . 17 . 04 . 18 . 04 . 18 . 05 . 19 . 05 . 19 . 06 . 20 . 06 . 20 . 07 . 21 . 07 . 21 . 08 . 22 . 08 . 22 . 09 . 23 . 09 . 23 . 10 . 24 . 10 . 24 . 11 . 25 . 11 . 25 . 12 . 26 . 12 . 26 . 13 . 27 . 13 . 27 . 14 . 28 . 14 . 28 .
C u rr e nt Ac t iv e M a p: ma p 1 < < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >
72
6.3 Alarm History

Press "Q" from the Controller Menu to display alarm history, then use arrow keys to move the cursor at the desired option of alarm messages. Press ENTER to confirm the selection, then the current selection will be hgihlighted by an asterisk (*).
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = A la r m H is t or y = = = 10 : 45 :0 6 04 / 12 / 20 0 4
< < AR R OW LE F T/ R IG H T: S e l ec t A l ar m M e ss a ge ; E n te r : A cc e pt ; E S C: E x i t. >> S e l ec t A l ar m M e ss a ge : CR I TI C AL M A JO R
M IN O R
INFO
*A L L
Press ENT ER from the above m enu, the following screen will show up alarm history. NOTE: The Max. alarm records are 200.
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = A la r m H is t or y = = = 10 : 45 :3 0 04 / 12 / 20 0 4 2 1 M A JR > Un i t A : E 1 ca r d C H 09 LO S -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :5 2 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 2 2 M A JR > Un i t A : E 1 ca r d C H 10 LO S -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :5 2 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 2 3 M A JR > Un i t A : E 1 ca r d C H 11 LO S -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :5 2 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 2 4 M A JR > Un i t A : E 1 ca r d C H 12 LO S -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :5 2 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 2 5 M A JR > Un i t A : E 1 ca r d C H 01 LO S -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :5 2 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 2 6 M A JR > Un i t A : E 1 ca r d C H 02 LO S -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :5 2 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 2 7 M A JR > Un i t A : E 1 ca r d C H 03 LO S -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :5 2 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 2 8 M A JR > Un i t A : E 1 ca r d C H 04 LO S -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :5 2 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 2 9 C R IT > We s t- a S T M- 1 L O S- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :5 0 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 3 0 C R IT > We s t- a S T M- 1 L O F- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :5 0 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 3 1 M I NR > Ea s t V C4 - RD I- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :5 0 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 3 2 I N FO > Un i t A : E 1 ca r d E Q P- - -- - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :5 0 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 3 3 M A JR > F A N # 4 F ai le d - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :4 9 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 3 4 M A JR > F A N # 3 F ai le d - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :4 9 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 3 5 M A JR > F A N # 2 F ai le d - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :4 9 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 3 6 M A JR > F A N # 1 F ai le d - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :4 9 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 3 7 I N FO > We s t- a O p ti ca l Mo d ul e E Q P- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :4 9 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 3 8 I N FO > Ea s t- a O p ti ca l Mo d ul e E Q P- - -- - -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -1 0: 1 7 :4 9 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04
< < SP A CE ba r t o c h an ge p ag e o r E S C k ey re tu r n t o p r ev i ou s m e nu > >
73
6.4 Current Alarm Status

Press "A" from the Controller Menu to display alarm status for east side and west side.
O 9 1 00 - CO [ E a st si d e] a S TM 1 L O S: a S TM 1 L O F: a M S- A IS : a M S- R DI : b b b b S TM 1 L O S: S TM 1 L O F: M S- A IS : M S- R DI : = = = C ur r en t A l ar m S t at u s = == [ We s t s i de ] a S T M 1 L OS : a S T M 1 L OF : a M S - AI S : a M S - RD I : b b b b S T M 1 L OS : S T M 1 L OF : M S - AI S : M S - RD I : 1 0: 46 : 0 7 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
No No No No
a B 1- B I P : 0 a B 2- B I P : 0 a M S- R E I : 4 2 86
Yes Yes Yes No
a B 1- BI P : 5 07 0 a B 2- BI P : 8 43 0 a M S- RE I : 0
N. A . N. A . N. A . b B 1- B I P : 0 N. A . b B 2- B I P : 0 b M S- R E I : 0 No No Ye s No No 0 0
N . A. N . A. N . A. b B 1- BI P : 0 N . A. b B 2- BI P : 0 b M S- RE I : 0 Yes No No Yes No 3 1 77 0 0
A U4 - LO P A U4 - AI S V C4 - RD I V C4 - PL M V C4 - LO M B3 - BI P HP - RE I
: : : : : : :
A U 4 -L O P A U 4 -A I S V C 4 -R D I V C 4 -P L M V C 4 -L O M B 3 -B I P H P -R E I
: : : : : : :
6.5 System Information

Press "I" from the Controller Menu to display detail s ystem information. This menu is used to display the s ystem information for the height of manu unit and the status of trunk modules and power supply.
O 9 1 00 = == Sy s te m I n fo rm a t io n = = = 2 2: 52 : 1 8 0 2/ 0 6/ 2 00 6
C a se : 3 U- E TS I [ cu r re n t t yp e] U n i t A : E 1 - 28 po r ts (7 5 oh m ) Unit B: x Unit C: x U n i t D : E th e rn e t- s wi tc h East West East West a: a: b: b: D ua l 1 3 10 sh or t D ua l 1 3 10 lo ng U ne q ui p pe d U ne q ui p pe d
[ re g is t er t y p e] E1 E th e rn e t- sw i t ch E th e rn e t- sw i t ch E1
c ar d t yp e mi s ma t ch
P ow e r1 : N ot i ns t al l ed P ow e r2 : D C 2 0 ~6 0 V - of f P ow e r3 : N ot i ns t al l ed
E a s t D at a f r om : E a st -A W e s t D at a f r om : W e st -A
74
6.6 STM-1 Performance

Press "P" from the Controller Menu to display the detail ST M-1 performance. This menu offers three subm enus for user to view three form at performance report, see below screen.
O 9 1 00 = = = S TM - 1 P ER F OR M AN CE D is p la y = = = 1 9: 23 : 0 8 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4
1 - > 1 - Ho u r P er f. R ep o rt 2 - > 2 4 -H o ur Pe rf . Re p or t 3 - > 7 - da y P e rf . R e po r t
6.6.1 1-Hour Performance Report

Press "1" from the ST M-1 Performance Display submenu to view one hour performance report. Use arrow k ey to m ove the cursor at the desired option, and TAB k ey to switch a desired type.
= = 1- h ou r P e rf . R e po rt S el e ct i on == A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e : U S ER PORT Type : Ea : B 1 (B IP - 8 ) 1 9: 23 : 4 2 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4
< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o ab o r t, EN T ER ke y t o s ho w Pe r f. Re p or t > >
75
Press ENTER from the above m enu. Use TAB key to display the detail report, as below screens show. T hen use ESC to return the previous menu, or SPACE k ey to refresh the report.
= = = 1 -H o ur Pe r f. R e p or t = = = 1 9: 24 : 0 9 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4 U S E R B 1( B IP - 8) - - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 5 4 9 s ec o nd s (E S ) ( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al : 0 0 0 0 1s t N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0 0 0 0 2n d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0 0 0 0 3r d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0 0 0 0 4t h N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0 0 0 0
< < TA B k e y t o s ho w S ta t i st i cs Re p or t > > < < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>
= = = 1 -H o ur St a t. R e p or t = = = 1 9: 24 : 2 1 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4 U S E R B 1( B IP - 8) - - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 5 6 0 s ec o nd s ( %A S ) (% E FS ) ( % E S) ( % BE S ) (% S ES ) Cu r re n t 1 5- M in : 10 0 .0 0 0 1 00 . 00 0 0 .0 0 0 00 0. 0 00 0 0 0 .0 0 00 0 1s t N e ar e st 15 - Mi n : 10 0 .0 0 0 1 00 . 00 0 0 .0 0 0 00 0. 0 00 0 0 0 .0 0 00 0 2n d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n : 10 0 .0 0 0 1 00 . 00 0 0 .0 0 0 00 0. 0 00 0 0 0 .0 0 00 0 3r d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n : 10 0 .0 0 0 1 00 . 00 0 0 .0 0 0 00 0. 0 00 0 0 0 .0 0 00 0 4t h N e ar e st 15 - Mi n : 10 0 .0 0 0 1 00 . 00 0 0 .0 0 0 00 0. 0 00 0 0 0 .0 0 00 0
< < TA B k e y t o s ho w P er f o rm a nc e R e po r t > > < < ES C k e y t o r et u rn t o pr e vi o us me n u, SP AC E ba r t o r e fr e sh >>
76
6.6.2 24-Hour Performance Report

Press "2" from the ST M-1 Performance Display submenu to view 24-hour performance report. Use arrow k ey to m ove the cursor at the desired option, and TAB k ey to switch a desired type.
== 2 4- h ou r P e rf . R e po rt S el e ct i on == A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e P a r am e te r PORT Type : : : : U S ER ES Ea B 1 (B IP - 8 ) 1 9: 24 : 4 4 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4
Press ENTER from the above m enu. Use TAB key to display the detail report, as below screens show. T hen use ESC to return the previous menu, or SPACE k ey to refresh the report.
== = 2 4 -H o ur Pe r f. R e p or t = = = 1 9: 24 : 5 9 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4 U S E R E S B1 ( BI P -8 ) - - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 5 9 8 s ec o nd s - - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 1 5 (E S ) ( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al : 0 0 0 0 Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l : 0 0 0 0 - - US E R, 01 - 08 09 - 16 17 - 24 25 - 32 33 - 40 41 - 48 49 - 56 57 - 64 65 - 72 73 - 80 81 - 88 89 - 96 ES , B 1( B IP -8 ) , L a st 96 15 - Mi n I nt e r va l : > 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 > 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -
0 - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - -
77
== = 2 4 -H o ur St a t. R e p or t = = = U S E R % ES B 1 (B I P- 8 ) - - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 6 0 6 s ec o nd s - - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 1 5 ( %E S ) (% U AS ) (% B E S) ( % SE S ) Cu r re n t 1 5- M in : 0. 0 00 0 0 0 .0 0 00 0 0 .0 0 0 00 0. 0 00 0 0 Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r : 0. 0 00 0 0 0 .0 0 00 0 0 .0 0 0 00 0. 0 00 0 0 - - US E R, 01 - 08 09 - 16 17 - 24 25 - 32 33 - 40 41 - 48 49 - 56 57 - 64 65 - 72 73 - 80 81 - 88 89 - 96 %E S , B1 ( BI P- 8 ) , L as t 9 6 1 5 -M i n In t e rv a l : > 0 .0 0 00 0 0 .0 0 0 00 0. 0 00 0 0 0 .0 0 00 0 0 . 00 0 00 0. 0 00 0 0 > 0 .0 0 00 0 0 .0 0 0 00 0. 0 00 0 0 0 .0 0 00 0 0 . 00 0 00 0. 0 00 0 0 > - -- - -- - - -- - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- -- - -- - > - -- - -- - - -- - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- -- - -- - > - -- - -- - - -- - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- -- - -- - > - -- - -- - - -- - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- -- - -- - > - -- - -- - - -- - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- -- - -- - > - -- - -- - - -- - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- -- - -- - > - -- - -- - - -- - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- -- - -- - > - -- - -- - - -- - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- -- - -- - > - -- - -- - - -- - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- -- - -- - > - -- - -- - - -- - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- -- - -- - -
1 9: 25 : 0 7 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4
0 .0 00 0 0 0 .0 00 0 0 - -- -- - - -- -- - - -- -- - - -- -- - - -- -- - - -- -- - - -- -- - - -- -- - - -- -- - - -- -- - -
0 . 00 0 00 - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - --
6.6.3 7-Day Performance Report

Press "3" from the STM-1 Performance Display subm enu to view 7-day performance report. Use arrow k ey to m ove the cursor at the desired option, and TAB k ey to switch a desired type.
= = = 7 -D a ys Pe r f. R e p or t = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e : U S ER PORT Type : Ea : B 1 (B IP - 8 ) 1 9: 25 : 1 7 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4
78
Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Press ENTER from the above m enu. Use TAB key to display the detail report, as below screens show. T hen use ESC to return the previous menu, or SPACE k ey to refresh the report.
= = = 7 -D a ys Pe r f. R e p or t = = = 1 9: 25 : 1 7 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4 U S E R B 1( B IP - 8) - - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 1 5 (E S ) ( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l : 0 0 0 0 05 / 06 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -05 / 05 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -05 / 04 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -05 / 03 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -05 / 02 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -05 / 01 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -04 / 30 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - --
= = = 7 -D a ys St a t. R e p or t = = = 1 9: 25 : 2 4 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4 U S E R B 1( B IP - 8) - - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 1 5 ( %A S ) (% E FS ) ( % E S) ( % BE S ) (% S ES ) Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r : 10 0 .0 0 0 1 00 . 00 0 0 .0 0 0 00 0. 0 00 0 0 0 .0 0 00 0 05 / 06 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - -- - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- 05 / 05 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - -- - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- 05 / 04 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - -- - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- 05 / 03 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - -- - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- 05 / 02 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - -- - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- 05 / 01 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - -- - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- 04 / 30 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - -- - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - -- -
79
6.7 Configuration Setup

Press S from the Controller Menu to set up s ystem configuration. Below subm enu is for O9100 without CO (Ring Closure) option. For O9100 without CO (Ring Closure) option:
O 9 1 00 = = = S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n S et u p = == 1 6: 27 : 3 0 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
-> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> ->
S y st e m C on fi g u ra t io n T i mi n g S ou rc e m i sc . S T M- 1 C o nf i g S y st e m M od e P r ot e ct i on S e t up P r ot e ct i on M a n ua l S w it c h P a ss w or d S et u p B r id g e I nf o S e tu p C u st o me r i nf o r ma t io n S e tu p A P SD se t up L o we r O r de r P a th AI S G a te w ay Ne tw o r k E le m en t S e tu p D H CP Se t up L o we r O r de r M a pp i ng Mo d e H D LC Ba n dw id t h S e tu p
For O9100 with CO (Ring Closure) option: Below subm enu will show up only when CO (Ring Closure) option is purchased. User may use these two commands, P" and "Q, to do Ring Closure setting. For more detail information, see the following screens.
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = S ys t em Co n fi g ur at i o n S et u p = == 0 9: 37 : 2 9 0 4/ 2 2/ 2 00 4
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N P Q
-> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> ->
S y st e m C on fi g u ra t io n T i mi n g S ou rc e m i sc . S T M- 1 C o nf i g S y st e m M od e P r ot e ct i on S e t up P r ot e ct i on M a n ua l S w it c h P a ss w or d S et u p B r id g e I nf o S e tu p H D LC Ba n dw id t h S e tu p A P SD se t up L o we r O r de r M a pp i ng Mo d e G a te w ay Ne tw o r k E le m en t S e tu p D H CP Se t up L o we r O r de r M a pp i ng Mo d e R i ng Cl o su re P a yl o ad Ty pe f or Re t im i ng
80
6.7.1 System Configuration

Press A from the System Configuration Setup submenu to do s ystem setting. Use arrow keys to m ove the cursor at the desired option, and BACKSPACE k ey to edit. See also below screen.
O 9 1 00 - CO = == Sy s te m S et u p = = = 1 0: 21 : 0 9 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: hh :m m : ss mm / dd / yy y y, BA CK S P AC E t o e d it [ S y st e m] T i m e/ D at e : 1 0: 21 : 0 9 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4 I P Ad d re s s : 1 92 .1 6 8 .1 0 0. 2 41 S u b ne t M a sk : 2 55 .2 5 5 .2 5 5. 0 00 G at e w ay IP : 19 2 .1 68 . 1 00 . 25 4 T r a p I P A dd r es s : 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 C om m u ni t y( G et ) : pu b li c : 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 C om m u ni t y( S et ) : pr i va te : 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 : 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 D e v ic e N a me : O 91 00 S y s te m L o ca t io n : 8 F, N o . 8 H si n A n n R d. S ci en c e -B a se d I n du s tr i al P a r k H si nc h u , 3 00 7 7 T ai w an S y s te m C o nt a ct : N am e: F A E Te l :+ 8 86 - 3- 5 78 76 9 6 E -m ai l : FA E @l o op . co m .t w F ax : +8 8 6- 3 -5 7 87 69 5
[ C O NS O LE po r t] B a u d R at e : D a t a L en g th : P a r it y : < < Pr e ss ES C k e y
9 60 0 8 -B it s S to p Bi t N ON E X ON _ X OF F t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >
: 1- B it : XO F F
6.7.2 Timing Source

Press B from the System Configuration Setup submenu to set up timing source. Use arrow keys to move the cursor at the desired option, and TAB k ey to switch selection. See also below screen.
O 9 1 00 = = = T im i ng So ur c e = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S C l o ck M o de : No n- r e ve r ti v e 0 0: 13 : 4 2 0 4/ 1 8/ 2 00 4
E a s t s id e W e s t s id e E x t er n al T r i bu t ar y I n t er n al
c l oc k c l oc k c l oc k c l oc k c l oc k
: : : : :
Pr i o ri t y 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 1st
So u rc e Ea si d e Wa si d e Ex t e- 1 Un i t- A In t er n al
S 1b y te
1 0
S t at u s I n va l id V a li d I n va l id I n va l id V a li d
Ac t iv e No No No No Y es
Note: In SSM m ode the SSM m ode clock must be set up for a pair of devices. These two devices must be adjacent. A setup example is shown below.
81
East O9100#1 Wast East O9100#2 Wast East O9100#3 Wast
Wast O9100#6 East Wast O9100#5 East Wast O9100#4 East
Source EAST WEST EXTE TRIB INTE
Priority 2
nd
Source EAST WEST EXTE TRIB INTE
Priority Null 3
rd th th st
Null 4 5
th th st
4 5
Figure 6- 1 SSM mode clock
82
6.7.3 MISC. STM-1 Config

Press C from the System Configuration Setup submenu to do m iscellaneous STM-1 setting. Use arrow k eys to move the cursor at the desired option, and TAB key to edit. See also below screen.
O 9 1 00 = == mi s c. ST M -1 Co nf i g S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S C o m bu s S e le c ti o n : E as t Si d e J 0 _L E N E x pe c te d _J 0 _M S G T X _J 0 _M S G J 1 _L E N E x pe c te d _J 1 _M S G T X _J 1 _M S G : : : : : : 16 L oo p L oo p 16 L oo p L oo p 0 1: 35 : 0 8 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
HP - EP S L : 2 ( T UG )
6.7.4 System Mode

Press D from the System Configuration Setup subm enu to select s ystem mode. Use TAB key or ENT ER key to select options. See also below screen.
O 9 1 00 - CO = == Sy s te m M o de S e t up == = T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct S y s te m M o de : A DM 1 0: 20 : 4 9 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
83
6.7.5 Protection Setup

This menu is used to set up protection setting. Press E from the System Configuration Setup submenu to set up. Use arrow k eys to m ove the cursor at the desired option, and TAB key to edit. See also below screen. SNCP: Sub Network Connection Protection is applied in ADM m ode only, lik e ADM and ADM1+1 m odes. MSP: Multiplex Section Protection is applied in 1 + 1 protection, lik e T M1+1, 2TM1+1, and ADM1+1 m odes.
O 9 1 00 - CO == = P r ot e ct i on S e t up == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S 1 3: 21 : 4 7 0 5/ 2 4/ 2 00 7
S N CP
r e ve r ti ve N O N- R EV ER T I VE E a st OFF W es t O FF r e ve r ti v e N O N- R EV E RT I VE di r e ct i on a l UN I - DI R EC T IO N AL
MS P 1+ 1 :
WT R t i me r v a lu e f or r ev e rt i ve MS P : 0 30
s e co n ds
Press E from the System Configuration Setup submenu to set up MSP1+1 protection. 1. Use arrow k ey to m ove the cursor at "UNI-DIRECT IONAL" option. 2. Use TAB or ' key to change "UNI-DIRECTIONAL" as "BI-DIRECTIONAL". 3. Move the cursor at the "OFF" under "East" item. 4. Use TAB or ' key to select "ON". See also the second screen.
S N CP
MS P 1+ 1 :
s e co n ds
84
Chapter 6 Terminal Operation The MSP1+1 protection is enable now as below screen shows.
S N CP
MS P 1+ 1 :
s e co n ds
6.7.6 MSP User Command

Press "F" from the "System Configuration Setup" screen, then the following screen will show up. T his menu is used to choose the APS command to decide a working line from three m odes: Lock out of Protection, Force Switch and Manual Switch.
O 9 1 00 - CO == = M S P U se r C om m a nd == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S 1 3: 24 : 2 9 0 5/ 2 4/ 2 00 7
[ E a st ] A P S C o mm a nd : CL E AR W o r ki n g L in e : a- s id e
[ We s t ] A PS C om m an d : C L EA R W or k i ng Li n e : a - si d e
Note : L O P= Lo c ko u t Of P ro t ec t io n F S = Fo r ce Sw it c h M S = Ma n ua l S wi t c h
85
6.7.7 Password Setup

Press G from the System Configuration Setup submenu to set up password for system. Move the cursor at the desired location, then use arrow k eys to select password. Press ENT ER to confirm the setting, or ESC to abort the setting. T he system will require user to key in the old and new passwrod, then key in the new password again to confirm the setting.
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = P as s wo r d Se t u p = == A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , B A CK S PA C E t o e di t, E SC to ab o rt 1 0: 23 : 2 1 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
< < AR R OW LE F T/ R IG H T: S e l ec t P a ss w or d ; E nt er : Ac c ep t t o c h an g e; E S C : E xi t . > > S e l ec t : Op e ra t or * Ad m in i st r at o r Ol d P as s wo rd : X X XX Ne w P as s wo rd : X X XX C o nf i rm Pa s sw or d :
> > P l ea s e i np u t n ew p a s sw o rd ag a in to co nf i r m, th e n p re s s E NT ER .
6.7.8 Bridge Info Setup

Press H from the System Configuration Setup submenu to set up Bridge information.
O 9 1 00 - CO = == Br i dg e I n fo S e t up == = 1 1: 33 : 2 7 0 6/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: 0~ 65 5 3 5, BA C KS P AC E t o e di t
M A C AD D R : 0 0 :5 0 :c 6 :0 0 :9 4: b 3 P r io ri t y : 3 2 76 8 C o st : 0 P o rt : 0 20 s e c He l lo Ti m e : 2 s ec 0 0 :5 0 :c 6 :0 0 :9 4: b 3 3 2 76 8 He l lo Ti m e : 0 2 s ec
1 5 s ec
B r i dg e I D M A C A DD R : B r i dg e I D P r io r it y : B r i dg e M a x A ge : 2 0 s e c A g i ng ti m e : 3 00 s e c Port ---fec west east R ol e - -- D sg D sg D sg S ta t e - -- - Fw d Fw d Fw d C os t - -- 0 19 0 19 0 19
Fo r wa r d D el ay : 1 5
s ec
P r io Ed g -p - - -- -- - -128 No 128 No 128 No
P- P -- No Ye s Ye s
Note: Dsg(designate), Alt(alternate), Fwd(forwarding),Lrn(learning), Dis(disable), Prio(priority), Edg-p(edge-port),p-p(point to point), fec(fast ethernet), Blk(blocking)
86
6.7.9 Customer information Setup

Press I from the System Configuration Setup submenu to set up Customer Information. See also below screen.
O 9 1 00 = = = C us t om e r I nf o rm at i o n S et u p = == A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , B A CK S PA C E t o e di t, E SC to ab o rt 16 :2 4 : 45 09 / 20 / 20 0 5
P o rt # Ea Eb Wa Wb
C us t om e r I nf or m a ti o n ST M 1 No t U s ed ST M 1 No t U s ed
6.7.10
APSD (Automatic Power Shutdown) Setup
Press J from the System Configuration Setup submenu to enable or disable automatic power shutdown. T his menu also allows user to set up the pulse repetition tim e for automatic restart. Use arrow k eys to move the cursor and TAB or ` key to roll up or roll down the options. See also below screen.
O 9 1 00 - CO == = A P SD Se tu p == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S 0 9: 48 : 1 8 0 4/ 2 2/ 2 00 4
A P S D e na b le : O FF p u l se re p et i ti o n t im e f o r a ut o ma t ic re s ta rt ( s ec ) : 06 0 Ea Eb Wa Wb ma n ua l ma n ua l ma n ua l ma n ua l r e st a rt r e st a rt r e st a rt r e st a rt : : : : OF F OF F OF F OF F
Note: If the inband managem ent channel that is riding on the laser signal is disconnected, then the user should restart it m anually.
87
6.7.11
Lower Order Path AIS
T his menu is used to enable or disable AIS when VC4_LOM occurs. Press K from the System Configuration Setup subm enu, then the screen will show as below. Use TAB or Key to switch "YES" for enable or "NO" for disable.
O 9 1 00 = == Pr o te c ti o n M an ua l Sw i tc h = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S 1 4: 11 : 0 9 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
A I S g en e ra t ed wh e n Ea s t V C 4_ L OM : Y ES A I S g en e ra t ed wh e n We s t V C 4_ L OM : Y ES
6.7.12
Gateway Network Element Setup
Press L from the System Configuration Setup submenu to enable or disable Gateway network elem ent.
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = G e tw a y N et w or k E le m e nt Se t up == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S G a t ew a y N et w or k E l em en t : Di s ab l e 1 1: 37 : 0 9 0 6/ 2 3/ 2 00 5
88
6.7.13
DHCP Setup
Press M from the System Configuration Setup submenu to set up DHCP (Dynam ic Host Configuration Protocol) relay. Note: that DHCP relay is available for Gateway only. Before setting up DHCP relay, m ak e sure the "Gatway Network Elem ent" is enable.
O 9 1 00 - CO = == DH C P R el a y Se t u p = == 1 1 :3 7: 3 6 0 6 /2 3 /2 0 05 D H C P s er v er IP : 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 D H C P r el a y : D is ab l e
D H C P r el a y c an no t w or k in th e b r id g e m od e
To enable gateway network element, press ESC from the above m enu. T hen press "L" from the "System Configuration Setup" subm enu to enable the gateway networ k element, as below screen shows.
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = G e tw a y N et w or k E le m e nt Se t up == = 1 1: 38 : 4 3 0 6/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S G a t ew a y N et w or k E l em en t : En a bl e L a n R o ut i ng Pr o to c ol : R IP 1 L a n I P A d rr e ss : 0 00 . 00 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 Sy st e m I P A d dr e ss : 01 0 . 00 3 .0 1 1. 0 12 L a n S u bn e t M as k : 0 00 . 00 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 Sy st e m S u bn e t M as k : 25 5 . 25 5 .0 0 0. 0 00 Num De s ti n at i on P r ef i x Ga te w a y 01 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 .0 00 16 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00 02 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 .0 00 16 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00 03 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 .0 00 16 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00 04 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 .0 00 16 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00 05 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 .0 00 16 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00 06 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 .0 00 16 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00 07 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 .0 00 16 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00 08 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 .0 00 16 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00 09 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 .0 00 16 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00 10 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 .0 00 16 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00 11 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 .0 00 16 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00 12 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 .0 00 16 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00 13 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 .0 00 16 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00 14 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 .0 00 16 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00 15 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 .0 00 16 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00 16 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 .0 00 16 0 00 . 00 0. 0 0 0. 0 00 > > Ch a ng e c o nf i gu r at io n (Y / N) ? ( N ot e :t o s av e , pl e as e u s e V -c o mm an d )
67
After the gateway network element is enable. Go back to "DHCP Relay Setup" m enu and enable the DHCP relay.
O 9 1 00 - CO = == DH C P Re l ay S e t up == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S D H C P s er v er IP : 0 00 .0 0 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 D H C P r el a y : D is ab l e 1 1: 40 : 0 6 0 6/ 2 3/ 2 00 5
6.7.14
Lower Order Mapping Mode
Press N from the System Configuration Setup submenu to mak e TU12 or T U11 selection. Use TAB or ENTER key to set up. See also below screen.
O 9 1 00 - CO = == Lo w er Or d er Ma pp i n g M od e = = = T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct T U 1 2/ T U1 1 s e le c t: TU 12 1 1: 40 : 3 8 0 6/ 2 3/ 2 00 5
67
6.7.15
Ring Closure
This menu is available only when CO (Ring Closure) option is purchased. Press P from the System Configuration Setup submenu to enable or disable Payload Alignm ent for Ring Closure. Use arrow k eys to move the cursor and TAB k ey or ` key to enable or disable it.
O 9 1 00 - CO = == R in g C l os u re ( Pa y lo ad A li g nm e nt ) = = = 1 5: 18 : 0 5 0 4/ 2 9/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S
R i n g c lo s ur e (p a yl o ad a l i gn m en t ) : E n ab l e
> > Ch a ng e c o nf i gu r at io n (Y / N) ? ( N ot e :t o s av e , pl e as e u s e V -c o mm an d )
6.7.16
Payload Type for Retiming
This menu is available only when CO (Ring Closure) option is purchased. Press Q from the Sys tem Configuration Setup submenu to set up Payload retim ing for Ring Closure.
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = P ay l oa d T y pe fo r R e ti m in g = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S 1 5: 18 : 3 2 0 4/ 2 9/ 2 00 4
T U G 3# 1 : TU 1 2 T U G 3# 2 : TU 3 T U G 3# 3 : TU 1 2
67
6.7.17
HDLC Bandwidth Setup
Press O from the System Configuration Setup submenu to set up HDLC bandwidth. Two k inds of bandwidth are available: 3 or 12 channels. Use TAB or ENT ER k ey to select a desired option. See also below screen.
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = H DL C B a nd w id th S et u p = == T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct H D L C B an d wi d th : 3 C ha n n el s 1 4: 38 : 1 3 0 5/ 1 8/ 2 00 4
6.8 TSA Config

Press T from the Controller Menu to set up TSA. See also below screen.
O 9 1 00 - CO = == TS A C o nf i gu ra t i on == = 1 4: 07 : 4 2 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
A B C D
-> -> -> ->
TSA TSA TSA TSA
M ap Ch an g e D el e te ( r e mo v ed un i t) M ap De le t e M ap Co py
68
6.8.1 TSA Map Change

Press A from the T SA Configuration submenu to change TSA map. This m enu also shows up the current active map. Press Y or N to switch the current active map. See below screen shows.
O 9 1 00 - CO == = T S A C ha ng e == = 1 6: 37 : 2 1 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4 C u r re n t A ct i ve Ma p : ma p 1 C h a ng e C u rr e nt Ac t iv e M a p t o m ap 2 ( Y /N ) ?
6.8.2 TSA Delete (removed units)

Press B from the T SA Configuration submenu to delete Unit TSA map. Use TAB key or ENT ER key to select the desired option. See below screen shows.
U n i t A - E1 T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct Ma p # S lo t # St a rt E1 Ch a n Co u nt of Ch a n : : : : m ap 1 A 01 01 == = T S A D el et e == = 1 4: 05 : 3 8 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
C ur r en t A c ti ve M ap : m a p1
E1# 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
T U 12 t y pe 4 3 P .P . A/ D (E ) 4 4 P .P . A/ D (E ) 4 5 P .P . A/ D (E ) 4 6 P .P . A/ D (E ) 4 7 P .P . A/ D (E ) 4 8 P .P . A/ D (E ) 4 9 P .P . A/ D (E ) 5 0 P .P . A/ D (E )
E 1# 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
T U1 2 t yp e 5 1 P. P .A / D( E ) 5 2 P. P .A / D( E ) . . . . . .
E 1# 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
T U1 2 . . . . . . . .
t yp e
E 1# 25 26 27 28
TU12 . . . .
ty p e
( O n ly ch a nn e l 1 ,2 2 ,4 3 a r e u se d f o r T U3 in e t h er n et ca r d) < < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >
Note: W hen a card is rem ove from slot B, C or D, this screen will show up.
69
6.8.3 TSA Map Delete

PressC from the T SA Configuration submenu to delete all TSA m ap. Use TAB key or ENT ER key to select the desired option. See below screen shows.
O 9 1 00 - CO T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct = = = T SA Ma p D el e t e = == 1 4: 08 : 2 4 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
D e l et e A l l T SA in ma p1
6.8.4 TSA Map Copy

PressD from the T SA Configuration submenu to copy TSA m ap. Use TAB k ey or ENTER k ey to select the desired option. See below screen shows.
O 9 1 00 - CO = == TS A M a p Co p y = = = 1 4: 08 : 5 1 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
C o p y A ct i ve Ma p t o t he O th e r M ap : m a p1 - >m ap 2 C o p y A ct i ve Ma p t o m ap 2 (Y / N) ?
70
6.9 Alarm Setup

Press M from the Controller Menu to do alarm setup. See also below screen shows.
O 9 1 00 - CO = == Al a rm Se tu p == = 1 0: 30 : 2 6 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
A B C D E F G H I J K
-> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> ->
S y st e m A la rm S t m1 & H P Al a r m E a st TU G 3 Al a r m W e st TU G 3 Al a r m E a st TU Al ar m Ma s k W e st TU Al ar m Ma s k E a st TU Al ar m Re l ay W e st TU Al ar m Re l ay E a st TU Al ar m Se v er i ty W e st TU Al ar m Se v er i ty E x te r na l A la r m
6.9.1 System Alarm

Press A from the Alarm Setup submenu to set up s ystem alarm. This m enu is used to enable or disable alarm and relay, and also for setting alarm severity. Move the cursor at the desired location, and use TAB key to edit.
O 9 1 00 - CO = == Sy s te m A l ar m S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S A L A RM : EN A BL E D R EL AY : D IS A BL E D type a l ar m r e la y s e ve r it y A l m C u t O ff E N AB L ED D I SA B LE D I N FO P o w er Fa i le d E N AB L ED D I SA B LE D M A JR F a n F a il e d E N AB L ED D I SA B LE D M A JR T S Sy n c L os s E N AB L ED D I SA B LE D M I NR O M EQ P E N AB L ED D I SA B LE D I N FO O M UN E QP E N AB L ED D I SA B LE D I N FO U n i t E QP E N AB L ED D I SA B LE D I N FO U n i t U NE Q P E N AB L ED D I SA B LE D I N FO S N C P S wi t ch E N AB L ED D I SA B LE D M I NR M S P S wi t ch E N AB L ED D I SA B LE D M A JR 1 0: 30 : 4 3 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
( C R IT : CR I TI C AL , M A JR :M A J OR , M I NR : MI N OR , I NF O : IN F OR M ) < < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >
71
6.9.2 STM1 & HP Alarm

Press B from the Alarm Setup subm enu to do ST M1 & HP alarm setting. T his m enu is used to enable or disable alarm and relay, and also for setting alarm severity. Move the cursor at the desired location, and use TAB k ey to edit.
O 9 1 00 - CO == = S T M1 & H P A la rm S et u p = == A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S type S T M 1 S F/ S D S T M 1 L OS S T M 1 L OF M S - AI S M S - RD I A U 4 -L O P A U 4 -A I S V C 4 -R D I V C 4 -P L M V C 4 -L O M a l ar m E N AB L ED E N AB L ED E N AB L ED E N AB L ED E N AB L ED E N AB L ED E N AB L ED E N AB L ED E N AB L ED E N AB L ED r e la y D I SA B LE D D I SA B LE D D I SA B LE D D I SA B LE D D I SA B LE D D I SA B LE D D I SA B LE D D I SA B LE D D I SA B LE D D I SA B LE D s e ve r it y C R IT C R IT C R IT M A JR M I NR M A JR M A JR M I NR M I NR M A JR 1 0: 31 : 0 1 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
6.9.3 East TUG3 Alarm Setup

Press C from the Alarm Setup submenu to do TUG3 alarm setting for east side. This menu is used to enable or disable alarm and relay, and also for setting alarm severity. Move the cursor at the desired location, and use TAB key to edit.
== = E A ST TU G 3 A la rm S et u p = == A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S t u g 3# 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 t y pe LOP AIS RDI PLM LOP AIS RDI PLM LOP AIS RDI PLM a l ar m E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D r el a y D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D se v er it y MA J R MA J R MI N R MI N R MA J R MA J R MI N R MI N R MA J R MA J R MI N R MI N R 1 1: 58 : 1 6 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
72
6.9.4 West TUG3 Alarm Setup

Press D from the Alarm Setup submenu to do TUG3 alarm setting for west side. This menu is used to enable or disable alarm and relay, and also for setting alarm severity. Move the cursor at the desired location, and use TAB key to edit.
== = W E ST TU G 3 A la rm S et u p = == A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S t u g 3# 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 t y pe LOP AIS RDI PLM LOP AIS RDI PLM LOP AIS RDI PLM a l ar m E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D r el a y D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D se v er it y MA J R MA J R MI N R MI N R MA J R MA J R MI N R MI N R MA J R MA J R MI N R MI N R 1 1: 58 : 4 9 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
6.9.5 East TU Alarm Mask

Press E from the Alarm Setup submenu to do east side TU alarm mask setting. T his menu is used to enable or disable these alarm types: TU-LOP, TU-AIS, TU-RDI, TU-PLM. Move the cursor at the desired location, and use TAB k ey to edit. NOTE: W here K in (K,L,M) is T UG3, K = 1 to 3 W here L in (K,L,M) is T UG2, L = 1 to 7 W here M in (K,L,M) is T U11 or T U12, M = 1 to 4 for TU11 and 1 to 3 for TU12
O 9 1 00 - CO = == Ea s t T U A la r m Ma s k S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S T U G3 # : 1 ( K , L, M ) t u1 1 # t u1 2 # ( 1 , 1, 1 ) 01 01 ( 1 , 1, 2 ) 02 02 ( 1 , 1, 3 ) 03 03 ( 1 , 1, 4 ) 04 -( 1 , 2, 1 ) 05 04 ( 1 , 2, 2 ) 06 05 ( 1 , 2, 3 ) 07 06 ( 1 , 2, 4 ) 08 -( 1 , 3, 1 ) 09 07 ( 1 , 3, 2 ) 10 08 ( 1 , 3, 3 ) 11 09 ( 1 , 3, 4 ) 12 -( 1 , 4, 1 ) 13 10 ( 1 , 4, 2 ) 14 11 LO P EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN AIS EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN RD I EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN P LM EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN ( K, L , M) tu 1 1# tu 1 2# ( 1, 4 , 3) 1 5 12 ( 1, 4 , 4) 1 6 -( 1, 5 , 1) 1 7 13 ( 1, 5 , 2) 1 8 14 ( 1, 5 , 3) 1 9 15 ( 1, 5 , 4) 2 0 -( 1, 6 , 1) 2 1 16 ( 1, 6 , 2) 2 2 17 ( 1, 6 , 3) 2 3 18 ( 1, 6 , 4) 2 4 -( 1, 7 , 1) 2 5 19 ( 1, 7 , 2) 2 6 20 ( 1, 7 , 3) 2 7 21 ( 1, 7 , 4) 2 8 -1 0: 31 : 2 0 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
LO P EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
A IS EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
RDI EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
PL M EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
73
6.9.6 West TU Alarm Mask

Press F from the Alarm Setup submenu to do west side TU alarm mask setting. The operation is same as above m enu.
O 9 1 00 - CO = == We s t T U A la r m Ma s k S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S T U G3 # : 1 ( K , L, M ) t u1 1 # t u1 2 # ( 1 , 1, 1 ) 01 01 ( 1 , 1, 2 ) 02 02 ( 1 , 1, 3 ) 03 03 ( 1 , 1, 4 ) 04 -( 1 , 2, 1 ) 05 04 ( 1 , 2, 2 ) 06 05 ( 1 , 2, 3 ) 07 06 ( 1 , 2, 4 ) 08 -( 1 , 3, 1 ) 09 07 ( 1 , 3, 2 ) 10 08 ( 1 , 3, 3 ) 11 09 ( 1 , 3, 4 ) 12 -( 1 , 4, 1 ) 13 10 ( 1 , 4, 2 ) 14 11 LO P EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN AIS EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN RD I EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN P LM EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN ( K, L , M) tu 1 1# tu 1 2# ( 1, 4 , 3) 1 5 12 ( 1, 4 , 4) 1 6 -( 1, 5 , 1) 1 7 13 ( 1, 5 , 2) 1 8 14 ( 1, 5 , 3) 1 9 15 ( 1, 5 , 4) 2 0 -( 1, 6 , 1) 2 1 16 ( 1, 6 , 2) 2 2 17 ( 1, 6 , 3) 2 3 18 ( 1, 6 , 4) 2 4 -( 1, 7 , 1) 2 5 19 ( 1, 7 , 2) 2 6 20 ( 1, 7 , 3) 2 7 21 ( 1, 7 , 4) 2 8 -1 0: 31 : 2 0 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
LO P EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
A IS EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
RDI EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
PL M EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
6.9.7 East TU Alarm Relay

Press G from the Alarm Setup submenu to do east side TU alarm relay setting. Move the cursor at the desired location, and use TAB k ey to edit.
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = E as t T U A l ar m R el a y S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S T U G3 # : 1 ( K , L, M ) t u1 1 # t u1 2 # ( 1 , 1, 1 ) 01 01 ( 1 , 1, 2 ) 02 02 ( 1 , 1, 3 ) 03 03 ( 1 , 1, 4 ) 04 -( 1 , 2, 1 ) 05 04 ( 1 , 2, 2 ) 06 05 ( 1 , 2, 3 ) 07 06 ( 1 , 2, 4 ) 08 -( 1 , 3, 1 ) 09 07 ( 1 , 3, 2 ) 10 08 ( 1 , 3, 3 ) 11 09 ( 1 , 3, 4 ) 12 -( 1 , 4, 1 ) 13 10 ( 1 , 4, 2 ) 14 11 LO P DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S AIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS RD I DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S P LM D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS ( K, L , M) tu 1 1# tu 1 2# ( 1, 4 , 3) 1 5 12 ( 1, 4 , 4) 1 6 -( 1, 5 , 1) 1 7 13 ( 1, 5 , 2) 1 8 14 ( 1, 5 , 3) 1 9 15 ( 1, 5 , 4) 2 0 -( 1, 6 , 1) 2 1 16 ( 1, 6 , 2) 2 2 17 ( 1, 6 , 3) 2 3 18 ( 1, 6 , 4) 2 4 -( 1, 7 , 1) 2 5 19 ( 1, 7 , 2) 2 6 20 ( 1, 7 , 3) 2 7 21 ( 1, 7 , 4) 2 8 -1 0: 31 : 4 3 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
LO P DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S
A IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS
RDI DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS
PL M DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S
74
6.9.8 West TU Alarm Relay

Press H from the Alarm Setup submenu to do west side TU alarm relay setting. T he operation is same as above m enu.
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = W es t T U A l ar m R el a y S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S T U G3 # : 1 ( K , L, M ) t u1 1 # t u1 2 # ( 1 , 1, 1 ) 01 01 ( 1 , 1, 2 ) 02 02 ( 1 , 1, 3 ) 03 03 ( 1 , 1, 4 ) 04 -( 1 , 2, 1 ) 05 04 ( 1 , 2, 2 ) 06 05 ( 1 , 2, 3 ) 07 06 ( 1 , 2, 4 ) 08 -( 1 , 3, 1 ) 09 07 ( 1 , 3, 2 ) 10 08 ( 1 , 3, 3 ) 11 09 ( 1 , 3, 4 ) 12 -( 1 , 4, 1 ) 13 10 ( 1 , 4, 2 ) 14 11 LO P DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S AIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS RD I DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S P LM D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS ( K, L , M) tu 1 1# tu 1 2# ( 1, 4 , 3) 1 5 12 ( 1, 4 , 4) 1 6 -( 1, 5 , 1) 1 7 13 ( 1, 5 , 2) 1 8 14 ( 1, 5 , 3) 1 9 15 ( 1, 5 , 4) 2 0 -( 1, 6 , 1) 2 1 16 ( 1, 6 , 2) 2 2 17 ( 1, 6 , 3) 2 3 18 ( 1, 6 , 4) 2 4 -( 1, 7 , 1) 2 5 19 ( 1, 7 , 2) 2 6 20 ( 1, 7 , 3) 2 7 21 ( 1, 7 , 4) 2 8 -1 0: 31 : 4 3 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
LO P DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S
A IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS
RDI DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS
PL M DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S DI S
6.9.9 East TU Alarm Severity

Press I from the Alarm Setup submenu to do east side TU alarm severity setting. Move the cursor at the desired location, and use TAB k ey to edit.
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = E a st TU Al a rm Se ve r i ty Se t up == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S T U G3 # : 1 ( K , L, M ) t u1 1 # t u1 2 # ( 1 , 1, 1 ) 01 01 ( 1 , 1, 2 ) 02 02 ( 1 , 1, 3 ) 03 03 ( 1 , 1, 4 ) 04 -( 1 , 2, 1 ) 05 04 ( 1 , 2, 2 ) 06 05 ( 1 , 2, 3 ) 07 06 ( 1 , 2, 4 ) 08 -( 1 , 3, 1 ) 09 07 ( 1 , 3, 2 ) 10 08 ( 1 , 3, 3 ) 11 09 ( 1 , 3, 4 ) 12 -( 1 , 4, 1 ) 13 10 ( 1 , 4, 2 ) 14 11 LO P MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R AIS M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR RD I MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R P LM M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R ( K. L . M) tu 1 1# tu 1 2# ( 1, 4 , 3) 1 5 12 ( 1, 4 , 4) 1 6 -( 1, 5 , 1) 1 7 13 ( 1, 5 , 2) 1 8 14 ( 1, 5 , 3) 1 9 15 ( 1, 5 , 4) 2 0 -( 1, 6 , 1) 2 1 16 ( 1, 6 , 2) 2 2 17 ( 1, 6 , 3) 2 3 18 ( 1, 6 , 4) 2 4 -( 1, 7 , 1) 2 5 19 ( 1, 7 , 2) 2 6 20 ( 1, 7 , 3) 2 7 21 ( 1, 7 , 4) 2 8 -1 0: 32 : 0 7 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
LO P MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR
A IS M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R
RDI M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR
PL M MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R
75
6.9.10
West TU Alarm Severity
Press J from the Alarm Setup submenu to do west side TU alarm severity setting. The operation is same as above m enu.
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = W e st TU Al a rm Se ve r i ty Se t up == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S T U G3 # : 1 ( K , L, M ) t u1 1 # t u1 2 # ( 1 , 1, 1 ) 01 01 ( 1 , 1, 2 ) 02 02 ( 1 , 1, 3 ) 03 03 ( 1 , 1, 4 ) 04 -( 1 , 2, 1 ) 05 04 ( 1 , 2, 2 ) 06 05 ( 1 , 2, 3 ) 07 06 ( 1 , 2, 4 ) 08 -( 1 , 3, 1 ) 09 07 ( 1 , 3, 2 ) 10 08 ( 1 , 3, 3 ) 11 09 ( 1 , 3, 4 ) 12 -( 1 , 4, 1 ) 13 10 ( 1 , 4, 2 ) 14 11 LO P MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R AIS M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR RD I MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R P LM M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R M IN R ( K. L . M) tu 1 1# tu 1 2# ( 1, 4 , 3) 1 5 12 ( 1, 4 , 4) 1 6 -( 1, 5 , 1) 1 7 13 ( 1, 5 , 2) 1 8 14 ( 1, 5 , 3) 1 9 15 ( 1, 5 , 4) 2 0 -( 1, 6 , 1) 2 1 16 ( 1, 6 , 2) 2 2 17 ( 1, 6 , 3) 2 3 18 ( 1, 6 , 4) 2 4 -( 1, 7 , 1) 2 5 19 ( 1, 7 , 2) 2 6 20 ( 1, 7 , 3) 2 7 21 ( 1, 7 , 4) 2 8 -1 0: 32 : 0 7 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
LO P MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR
A IS M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R M AJ R
RDI M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR M I NR
PL M MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R MI N R
6.9.11
External (Environment) Alarm
Press K from the Alarm Setup submenu to do external (environment) alarm setting. Move the cursor at the desired location, and use TAB k ey to edit. See also below screen.
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = E xt e rn a l A la rm S et u p = == A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S 1 0: 32 : 2 8 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
E x t er n al E x t er n al E x t er n al E x t er n al
a l ar m Al a rm 1 :E N AB LE D Al a rm 2 :E N AB LE D Al a rm 3 :E N AB LE D Al a rm 4 :E N AB LE D
r e la y D I SA B LE D D I SA B LE D D I SA B LE D D I SA B LE D
s e ve r it y I N FO I N FO I N FO I N FO
m es s ag e e xt e rn a l e xt e rn a l e xt e rn a l e xt e rn a l
a la r m1 a la r m2 a la r m3 a la r m4
76
6.10 Sotre/ Restrieve Backup Configuration

Press V from the Controller Menu to store or retrieve backup configuration. See also below screen shows. Move the cursor at the desired option, STORE or RETRIEVE, then press ENTER to confirm the selection. T he current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = St o re / Re t ri e ve Co nf i g ur a ti o n= = = 1 0: 33 : 1 0 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
>> Se l ec t ?
*S T O RE
R ET R IE V E
6.11 File Transfer

Press L from the Controller Menu to do file transfer. See also below screen shows.
O 9 1 00 - CO = == F il e T r an sf e r == = 1 0: 33 : 2 6 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
A C D E F G
-> -> -> -> -> ->
D o wn l oa d M ai n b oa r d F ir m wa r e D o wn l oa d C ur r e nt Co n fi g ur a ti o n D o wn l oa d B ac k u p C on f ig u ra t io n U p lo a d C ur re n t C o nf i gu r at i on fr om F LA S H U p lo a d B ac ku p Co n fi g ur a ti o n f ro m F L AS H C h an g e F ir mw a r e B oo t B a nk
77
6.11.1
Download Mainboard Firware
Press A from the File Transfer submenu to download m ainboard firm ware. Use arrow k eys to m ove the cursor and BACKSPACE k ey to edit. This menu is allowed to set up firm ware version, the current firm ware bank , next boot firm ware, TFTP server IP address, and firm ware file name. See also below screen shows.
O 9 1 00 - CO = == Do w nl o ad Fi rm w a re == = 1 0: 33 : 5 0 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: nn n. n n n. n nn . nn n , B AC K SP AC E to ed i t F i r mw a re 1 V er s io n : F i r mw a re 2 V er s io n : C u r re n t F ir m wa r e B an k: N e x t B oo t F i rm w ar e : T F T P S er v er IP : F i r mw a re Fi l e N am e : S 1. 0 0 0 4/ 0 1/ 2 00 4 S 1. 0 0 0 4/ 0 1/ 2 00 4 1 1 0 00 . 00 0 .0 0 0. 0 00
< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o ab o r t, EN T ER ke y t o U pl o a d/ D ow n lo a d F ir m wa re > >
Note: From V1.xx upgrade to V2.xx, Config need to save again.
6.11.2
Download Current Configuration
Press C from the File Transfer subm enu to download the current firm ware configuration. Use arrow k eys to m ove the cursor and BACKSPACE k ey to edit. See also below screen shows.
O 9 1 00 - CO == = Do w nl o ad Cu r re n t Co n f ig u ra t io n = = = 1 0: 36 : 0 5 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: nn n. n n n. n nn . nn n , B AC K SP AC E to ed i t
T F T P S er v er IP C o n fi g F i le Na m e
: 0 00 . 00 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 :
67
6.11.3
Download Backup Configuration
Press D from the File Transfer subm enu to download back up firmware configuration. Use arrow k eys to m ove the cursor and BACKSPACE k ey to edit. See also below screen shows.
O 9 1 00 - CO == = Do w nl o ad Ba c ku p C on f i gu r at i on == = 1 0 :3 6: 0 5 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: nn n. n n n. n nn . nn n , B AC K SP AC E to ed i t
: 0 00 . 00 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 :
6.11.4
Upload Current Configuration from FLASH
Press E from the File Transfer submenu to upload the current firmware configuration from FLASH. Use arrow k eys to move the cursor and BACKSPACE k ey to edit. See also below screen shows.
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = U p lo a d C ur r en t C on f i gu r at i on == = 1 0: 36 : 2 4 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: nn n. n n n. n nn . nn n , B AC K SP AC E to ed i t
: 0 00 . 00 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 :
68
6.11.5
Upload Backup Configuration from FLASH
Press F from the File Transfer submenu to upload the back up firmware configuration from FLASH. Use arrow k eys to mvoe the cursor and BACKSPACE k ey to edit. See also below screen shows.
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = U p lo a d C ur r en t C on f i gu r at i on == = 1 0: 36 : 2 4 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: nn n. n n n. n nn . nn n , B AC K SP AC E to ed i t
: 0 00 . 00 0 .0 0 0. 0 00 :
6.11.6
Change Firmware Boot Bank
Press G from the File Transfer submenu to change firm ware boot bank . T his m enu is used to disply the current boot bank and to change book bank. Use TAB k ey to change boot bank . T hen reset the system to use the new firm ware. See also below screen shows.
O 9 1 00 - CO = = = C ha n ge Fi r mw a re B o o t B an k = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S 1 7: 29 : 2 5 0 6/ 2 9/ 2 00 5
C u rr e nt Bo o t B an k : 2 N e xt Bo o t B an k : 1
69
6.12 Loopback Setup

Press G from the Controller Menu to do STM-1 looback test. Use arrow k eys to m ove the cursor at the desired location, and ENTER key to select options. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*). See also below screen shows. Note: The purpose of the timer is to prevent the irretrievable loss of your Data Communication Channels (DCC) while doing loopback testing. When you are not in the DCC mode and wish to do loopback testing you can ignore the timer.
O 9 1 00 = = = S TM - 1 L oo p ba ck T es t = = = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT L o o pb a ck Ti m er ( s) : 1 11 1 1 11 1 F I B ER OP T IC A L E a : * OF F W a : * OF F E b : * OF F W b : * OF F L OC L OC L OC L OC PLB PLB PLB PLB LLB LLB LLB LLB 0 1: 40 : 1 9 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
6.13 Performance Setup/ Clear

Press R from the Controller Menu to clear performance data and set up performance threshold. See also below subm enu shows.
O 9 1 00 - CO == = ST M -1 PE R FO R MA N CE S e t up / Cl e ar == = 1 1: 57 : 1 4 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
C - > C l ea r P e rf or m a nc e D a ta D - > P e rf o rm a nc e T h re s ho l d S et u p
70
6.13.1
Clear Performance Data
Press C from the STM-1 PERFORMANCE Setup/Clear subm enu to clear performance data, then press Y or N to confirm it. See also below screen shows.
O 9 1 00 == = ST M -1 PE R FO R MA N CE S e t up / Cl e ar == = 1 9: 25 : 3 5 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4
C - > C l ea r P e rf or m a nc e D a ta D - > P e rf o rm a nc e T h re s ho l d S et u p
> > Cl e ar pe r fo r ma n ce d a t a - a r e y ou su r e [Y / N ] ?
6.13.2
Performance Threshold Setup
Press D from the STM-1 PERFORMANCE Setup/Clear submenu to do performance threshold setup. Use arrow k eys to m ove the cursor at the desired location, and TAB key to select options. See also below screen shows.
== = S T M- 1 P e rf o rm a nc e T h re s ho ld C ro s s A la r m S et 1 1: 57 : 2 4 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: 1~ 99 9 9 , B AC K SP A CE to ed it M o n it o r P oi n t B1 B2 B3 En / Di s EN EN EN s ev e ri t y I NF O I NF O I NF O Th r es h ol d 24 0 0 24 0 0 24 0 0
71
6.14 Unit Init/Clear

Press E from the Controller Menu to setup unit init/clear. Submenu screen shows below.
O 9 1 00 == = U n it In i t/ Cl e a r = == 2 2: 48 : 3 0 0 2/ 0 6/ 2 00 6
A - > I n it Mi s ma tc h Un i t B - > C l ea r R e mo ve d Un i t
72
6.14.1 Init Mismatch Unit

Press A from the Unit Init/Clear submenu to clear TSA and Init New Card. Use TAB k eys to roll option, ESC to abort and Enter key to select. T he screen shows below.
9100 = = = I ni t M i sm a tc h U n it == = 2 2 :4 9: 3 1 0 2 /0 6 /2 0 06 U s e T A B k ey to ro l l op t i on s , E SC to ab o rt , a n d E NT E R k ey to se le c t
C l e ar TS A a n d I ni t N ew C ar d f o r U ni t D
6.14.2 Clear Removed Unit

Press B from the Unit Init/Clear submenu to clear the TSA and Registration of the removed Unit Card. Use TAB keys to roll option, ESC to abort and Enter key to select. T he screen shows below.
O 9 1 00 = == Cl e ar Re m ov ed U ni t = = = 2 2: 48 : 5 7 0 2/ 0 6/ 2 00 6 U s e T A B k ey to ro l l op t i on s , E SC to ab o rt , a n d E NT E R k ey to se le c t
C l e ar TS A a n d R eg i st ra t i on of Re m ov e d U ni t B
73
6.15 Alarm Cut Off

Press Y from the Controller Menu to cut off alarm, then press Y or N to confirm it. See also below screen shows.
O 9 1 00 - CO == = C o nt r ol l er M e n u = == 1 0: 25 : 5 7 0 4/ 1 4/ 2 00 4 S e r ia l N u mb e r : 00 00 0 5 H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: A S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: S1 .0 0 11 / 30 / 20 0 3 [ D I SP L AY ] C - > C on f ig Di s pl a y N - > T SA Se t ti n g D is pl a y Q - > A la r m H is t or y A - > C ur r en t A l ar m S ta t u s I - > S ys t em In f or m at io n P - > S TM Pe r fo r ma n ce C on n e ct Po r t: SU P V_ P OR T S ta r t T i me : 10 : 24 : 54 0 4 / 14 / 20 0 4
[ SE T U P] S - > Co n fi g S e tu p T - > TS A M o di f y M - > Al a rm Se t up V - > St o re / Re t ri e ve Ba ck u p C o nf i g L - > Fi l e T ra n sf e r G - > Di a gn o st i cs R - > Pe r fo r ma n ce Se t up /C l e ar
[ MI S C ] Y - > Al a rm Cu t O f f Z - > Sy s te m R e se t X - > Cl e ar Al a rm Hi s to ry W - > Re t ur n t o D e fa u lt
> > Cu t o f f a la r m - a re y ou su r e ( Y/ N )?
6.16 System Reset

Press Z from the Controller Menu to reset system, then press Y to confirm or N to abort it. See also below screen shows.
R e s et - a re yo u s u re ? [ Y/ N ]
74
Chapter 6 Terminal Operation After keying a password, the user will see the following screen. T his menu is allowed the user to select reset-type: (1) warm restart, used to reset CPU only or (2) reset (cold restart), used to reset whole s ystem . Use arrow k eys to select a desired type, press ENT ER to confirm. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk(*).
O 9 1 00 = == Re s et Ma i n Bo a r d = == 0 9: 55 : 4 1 0 6/ 2 3/ 2 00 5
> > Se l ec t ?
* Wa r m re s t ar t
R e se t
6.17 Clear Alarm History

Press X from the Controller Menu to clear alarm history, then press Y or N to confirm it. See also below screen shows.
> > Cl e ar al a rm qu e ue o f AL L U N IT s - ar e y ou s ur e ? [Y / N]
75
6.18 Return to Default

Press W from the Controller Menu to return to default, then press Y or N to confirm it. See also below screen shows. NOTE: After returning to default, the system will not change the default settings for these options: IP address, Subnet mask, Gateway IP, Trap IP, Community (Get), and Community (Set).
== = C o nt r ol l er M e n u = == 1 0: 25 : 5 7 0 4/ 1 4/ 2 00 4
O 9 1 00 - CO
S e r ia l N u mb e r : 00 00 0 5 H a r dw a re Ve r si o n: A S o f tw a re Ve r si o n: S1 .0 0 11 / 30 / 20 0 3 [ D I SP L AY ] C - > C on f ig Di s pl a y N - > T SA Se t ti n g D is pl a y Q - > A la r m H is t or y A - > C ur r en t A l ar m S ta t u s I - > S ys t em In f or m at io n P - > S TM Pe r fo r ma n ce
C on n e ct Po r t: SU P V_ P OR T S ta r t T i me : 10 : 24 : 54 0 4 / 14 / 20 0 4
> > Re t ur n t o d e fa u lt - a re yo u s u re ? [ Y/ N]
6.19 Unit Menu - E1/ T1

Press U from the Controller Menu to enter into the Unit Menu. See also below screen shows. For E1:
Unit A - E1 == = U n it Me nu = == 0 0: 23 : 2 5 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5 H W Ve r si o n : A
[ D I SP L AY ] N - > T SA Se t ti n g D is pl a y S - > C ur r en t T S A S ta tu s D - > C on f ig Di s pl a y A - > C ur r en t A l ar m S ta t u s P - > P er f or m an c e K - > D ia g no s ti c s D is pl a y
[ SE T U P] T - > TS A S e tu p C - > Co n fi g S e tu p G - > Lo o pb a ck & D ia g no st i c s S et u p M - > Un i t A la r m S et u p R - > Pe r fo r ma n ce Se t up /C l e ar
[ L O G] F - > L og Of f O - > L og On U - > C ho o se a U ni t E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u
[ MI S C ] X - > Cl e ar Un i t A la r m Hi s t or y W - > Un i t L oa d D e fa u lt
76
Chapter 6 Terminal Operation For T1:

Unit A - T1 == = U n it Me nu = == 1 6: 33 : 1 6 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5 H W Ve r si o n : D
[ D I SP L AY ] N - > T SA Se t ti n g D is pl a y S - > C ur r en t T S A S ta tu s D - > C on f ig Di s pl a y A - > C ur r en t A l ar m S ta t u s P - > P er f or m an c e K - > D ia g no s ti c s D is pl a y
[ SE T U P] T - > TS A S e tu p C - > Co n fi g S e tu p G - > Lo o pb a ck & D ia g no st i c s S et u p M - > Un i t A la r m S et u p R - > Pe r fo r ma n ce Se t up /C l e ar
6.19.1 TSA Setting Display

Press N from the Unit Menu to display TSA setting. See also below screen shows. NOTE: P.P.A/D(W)means Path Protect Add/ Drop (West Side); P.P.A/D(E)means Path Protect Add/ Drop (East Side). For E1:
Unit A - E1 = == Un i t T SA Se t ti ng D is p la y = = = 1 0: 37 : 2 1 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -m a p1 -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - E 1 # T U 12 t y pe E 1# T U1 2 t yp e 01 . 15 . 0 2 0 2 P .P . A/ D (W ) 1 6 . 03 . 17 . 04 . 18 . 05 . 19 . 06 . 20 . 07 . 21 . 08 . 22 . 09 . 23 . 10 . 24 . 11 . 25 . 12 . 26 . 13 . 27 . 14 . 28 .
- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- m ap 2 -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -E 1# T U1 2 t yp e E 1# T U 1 2 ty p e 01 . 15 . 02 . 16 . 03 . 17 . 04 . 18 . 05 . 19 . 06 . 20 . 07 . 21 . 08 . 22 . 09 . 23 . 10 . 24 . 11 . 25 . 12 . 26 . 13 . 27 . 14 . 28 .
C u rr e nt Ac t iv e M a p: ma p 1
77
For T1:
Unit B - T1 = == Un i t T SA Se t ti ng D is p la y = = = 1 3: 11 : 3 0 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -m a p1 -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - T 1 # T U 12 t y pe T 1# T U1 2 t yp e 01 . 15 . 02 . 16 . 03 . 17 . 04 . 18 . 05 . 19 . 06 . 20 . 07 . 21 . 08 . 22 . 09 . 23 . 10 . 24 . 11 . 25 . 12 . 26 . 13 . 27 . 14 . 28 .
- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- m ap 2 -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -T 1# T U1 2 t yp e T 1# T U 1 2 ty p e 01 . 15 . 02 . 16 . 03 . 17 . 04 . 18 . 05 . 19 . 06 . 20 . 07 . 21 . 08 . 22 . 09 . 23 . 10 . 24 . 11 . 25 . 12 . 26 . 13 . 27 . 14 . 28 .
6.19.2 Current TSA Status

Press S from the Unit Menu to display the current TSA status. See also below screen shows. For E1:
Unit A - E1 = == Cu r re n t T SA S t a tu s = = = 1 0: 37 : 4 4 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
E1# 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
ad d /d r op st a tu s . We s t D ro p , E as t& W e st Ad d . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1 # 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
a d d/ d ro p s t at u s . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78

Unit B - T1 = == Cu r re n t T SA S t a tu s = = = 1 3: 11 : 5 3 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
T1# 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
ad d /d r op st a tu s . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T1 # 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
a d d/ d ro p s t at u s . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.19.3 Config Display

Press D from the Unit Menu to display s ystem configuration. See also below screen shows. For E1:
Unit A - E1 == = C o nf i g D is pl a y = = = 0 7: 07 : 5 8 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
H -> C ha n ne l L i ne In t er fa c e D i sp l ay S -> C ha n ne l P a th Ov e rh ea d Di s pl a y
79
For T1:
Unit B - T1 = == Co n fi g D is p l ay == = 1 3: 1 2 :1 2 0 9 /0 3 /2 0 04
H -> C ha n ne l L i ne In t er fa c e D i sp l ay S -> C ha n ne l P a th Ov e rh ea d Di s pl a y
6.19.3.1 Channel Line Interface Display

Press H from the Config Display to display channel line configuration. See also below screen shows. For E1:
Unit A - E1 = = = L in e I n te r fa ce D is p la y = = = 0 1: 3 6 :2 2 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04
E1# 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Co d in g HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3
E 1# 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
C o di n g H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3
80
Chapter 6 Terminal Operation For T 1:

Unit A - T1 = = = L in e I n te r fa ce D is p la y = = = 0 2: 0 2 :4 1 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04
T1# 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Co d in g B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S
c ab l e le n g th 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft
T 1# 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
C o di n g B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS
ca b le le ng t h 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t
6.19.3.2 Channel Path Overhead Display

Press S from the Config Display to display path overhead, then press ENT ER to show up the detail information. See also below screen shows. For E1:
Unit A - E1 = = = P at h O v er h ea d D i sp l ay == = 0 1: 3 7 :0 0 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04
C h a nn e l S el e ct i on : 01 J 2 _L E N : 1 6 E x pe c te d _J 2 _M S G : L oo p T X _J 2 _M S G : L oo p
HP - EP S L : 2 ( A sy n ch r on o us )
NOTE: LEN (length), MSG (message),HP-EPSL(High path-Expected Path Signal Label)
81
Chapter 6 Terminal Operation For T 1:

Unit A - T1 = = = P at h O v er h ea d D i sp l ay == = 0 1: 3 7 :0 0 0 4 /1 2 /2 0 04
C h a nn e l S el e ct i on : 01 J 2 _L E N : 1 6 E x pe c te d _J 2 _M S G : L oo p T X _J 2 _M S G : L oo p
6.19.4 Current Alarm Status

Press A from the Unit Menu to display the current alarm status. See also below screen shows. Use arrow k eys to select a desired page, the press ENT ER to confirm or ESC to abort. T he current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk(*). For E1:
Unit A - E1 = = = U ni t C u rr e nt S t a tu s = = = 1 0: 38 : 4 5 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
< < AR R OW LE F T/ R IG H T: S e l ec t P a ge ; E n te r : Ac c e pt ; E S C: Ex i t. >> S e l ec t : * E 1# 0 1~ 07 E 1 #0 8 ~1 4 E 1 # 15 ~ 21 E 1# 2 2~ 28
82
Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Press ENT ER from the above m enu.

Unit A - E1 = = = A l ar m S t at u s o f Ch a n ne l #1 ~ 7 = == [E 1 # 02 ] - TU 1 2# 2 E W TU 1 2 -L O P: No No TU 1 2 -A I S: No Y es TU 1 2 -R D I: No No TU 1 2 -P L M: No No L P - BI P : 81 0 L P - RE I : 78 0 L O S: Ye s [E 1 # 06 ] - T U1 2 #6 E W TU 1 2 -L O P: NA NA TU 1 2 -A I S: NA NA TU 1 2 -R D I: NA NA TU 1 2 -P L M: NA NA L P - BI P : NA NA L P - RE I : NA NA L O S: Ye s [ E1 # 0 3] -T U 12 # 3 E W T U1 2 - LO P : N A NA T U1 2 - AI S : N A NA T U1 2 - RD I : N A NA T U1 2 - PL M : N A NA LP - B IP : N A NA LP - R EI : N A NA L O S : Y es [ E1 # 0 7] -T U 12 # 7 E W T U1 2 - LO P : N A NA T U1 2 - AI S : N A NA T U1 2 - RD I : N A NA T U1 2 - PL M : N A NA LP - B IP : N A NA LP - R EI : N A NA L O S : Y es 1 0: 38 : 1 9 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4 [E 1# 0 4 ] - TU 1 2# 4 E W TU 12 - L OP : N A NA TU 12 - A IS : N A NA TU 12 - R DI : N A NA TU 12 - P LM : N A NA L P- B I P: N A NA L P- R E I: N A NA LO S : Y e s [ E 1 #0 1 ] - TU 1 2# 1 E W T U 1 2- L OP : N A NA T U 1 2- A IS : N A NA T U 1 2- R DI : N A NA T U 1 2- P LM : N A NA L P -B I P: N A NA L P -R E I: N A NA L OS : Y e s [ E 1 #0 5 ] - TU 1 2# 5 E W T U 1 2- L OP : N A NA T U 1 2- A IS : N A NA T U 1 2- R DI : N A NA T U 1 2- P LM : N A NA L P -B I P: N A NA L P -R E I: N A NA L OS : Y e s
For T1:
Unit B - T1 = = = U ni t C u rr e nt S t a tu s = = = 1 3: 13 : 4 9 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
< < AR R OW LE F T/ R IG H T: S e l ec t P a ge ; E n te r : Ac c e pt ; E S C: Ex i t. >> S e l ec t : * T 1# 0 1~ 07 T 1 #0 8 ~1 4 T 1 # 15 ~ 21 T 1# 2 2~ 28
83
Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Press ENT ER from the above screen.

Unit B [ T 1 #0 8 ] T U 1 2- L OP : T U 1 2- A IS : T U 1 2- R DI : T U 1 2- P LM : L P -B I P: L P -R E I: L OS : Y e s [ T 1 #1 2 ] T U 1 2- L OP : T U 1 2- A IS : T U 1 2- R DI : T U 1 2- P LM : L P -B I P: L P -R E I: L OS : Y e s E NA NA NA NA NA NA W NA NA NA NA NA NA E NA NA NA NA NA NA W NA NA NA NA NA NA - T1 = = = A l ar m S t at u s o f Ch a n ne l #8 ~ 14 == = [T 1 # 09 ] TU 1 2 -L O P: TU 1 2 -A I S: TU 1 2 -R D I: TU 1 2 -P L M: L P - BI P : L P - RE I : L O S: Ye s [T 1 # 13 ] TU 1 2 -L O P: TU 1 2 -A I S: TU 1 2 -R D I: TU 1 2 -P L M: L P - BI P : L P - RE I : L O S: Ye s E NA NA NA NA NA NA W NA NA NA NA NA NA E NA NA NA NA NA NA W NA NA NA NA NA NA [ T1 # 1 0] T U1 2 - LO P : T U1 2 - AI S : T U1 2 - RD I : T U1 2 - PL M : LP - B IP : LP - R EI : L O S : Y es [ T1 # 1 4] E T U1 2 - LO P : N A T U1 2 - AI S : N A T U1 2 - RD I : N A T U1 2 - PL M : N A LP - B IP : N A LP - R EI : N A L O S : Y es W NA NA NA NA NA NA E NA NA NA NA NA NA W NA NA NA NA NA NA 1 3: 14 : 0 8 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 [T 1# 1 1 ] E TU 12 - L OP : N A TU 12 - A IS : N A TU 12 - R DI : N A TU 12 - P LM : N A L P- B I P: N A L P- R E I: N A LO S : Y e s W NA NA NA NA NA NA
6.19.5 Unit Performance Display

Press P from the Unit Menu to display perform ance report. See also below screen shows. For E1:
Unit A - E1 = == UN I T P ER F OR M AN CE D is p la y = = = 1 9: 27 : 4 9 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4
1 - > U n it 1- H ou r P e rf . R e po r t 2 - > U n it 24 - Ho ur P er f . R ep o rt 3 - > U n it 7- D ay P e r f. Re p or t
84
For T1:
Unit -T1 = == UN I T P ER F OR M AN CE D is p la y = = = 1 3: 14 : 2 6 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
6.19.5.1 1-Hour Perf. Report

Press 1 from the Unit Performance Display menu to display 1-hour performance report. See also below screen shows. For E1:
U n i t A - E1 == U n i t 1 -h o ur Pe r f. Re po r t S e le c ti o n = = 1 9: 27 : 5 9 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e : U S ER Type C h a nn e l# : V 5 (B IP - 2 ) : 02
85
U n i t A - E1 = = = U ni t 1 - Ho u r P er f. R ep o rt == = 1 9: 29 : 0 7 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4 U S E R V 5( B IP - 2) Ch a nn el # 2 - - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 7 8 4 s ec o nd s (E S ) ( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al : 18 0 17 1 1s t N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -2n d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -3r d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -4t h N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - --
For T1:
Unit -T1 == U n i t 1 -h o ur Pe r f. Re po r t S e le c ti o n = = 1 3: 14 : 3 5 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e : U S ER Type C h a nn e l# : V 5 (B IP - 2 ) : 01
86
Unit -T1 = = = U ni t 1 - Ho u r P er f. R ep o rt == = 1 3: 26 : 4 0 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 U S E R V 5( B IP - 2) Ch a nn el # 2 1 - - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 6 2 4 s ec o nd s (E S ) ( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al : 0 92 0 0 1s t N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -2n d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -3r d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -4t h N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - --

Press 2 from the Unit Performance Display m enu to display 24-hour performance report. See also below screen shows. For E1:
U n i t A - E1 == U n i t 2 4- h ou r P e rf . R ep o r t S el e ct i on == 2 0: 25 : 1 4 0 8/ 1 0/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e P a r am e te r Type C h a nn e l# : : : : U S ER ES V 5 (B IP - 2 ) 01
87
U n i t A - E1 = = = U ni t 2 4 -H o ur Pe rf . Re p or t = = = 1 9: 43 : 2 2 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4 U S E R S ES CV ( LI N E) Ch an n e l# 2 - - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 7 3 9 s ec o nd s - - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 1 (E S ) ( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al : 0 7 39 0 0 Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l : 0 1 35 0 0 - - US E R, 01 - 08 09 - 16 17 - 24 25 - 32 33 - 40 41 - 48 49 - 56 57 - 64 65 - 72 73 - 80 81 - 88 89 - 96 SE S , C V( L IN E) , La s t > 0 - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - 9 6 1 5- M in In te r v al : - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -
- -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - -
For T1:
Unit -T1 == U n i t 2 4- h ou r P e rf . R ep o r t S el e ct i on == 1 3: 16 : 1 7 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e P a r am e te r Type C h a nn e l# : : : : U S ER ES V 5 (B IP - 2 ) 21
88
Unit -T1 = = = U ni t 2 4 -H o ur Pe rf . Re p or t = = = 1 3: 27 : 1 8 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 U S E R E S V5 ( BI P -2 ) C ha n n el # 21 - - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 6 6 1 s ec o nd s - - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 0 (E S ) ( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al : 0 1 29 0 0 Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -- - US E R, 01 - 08 09 - 16 17 - 24 25 - 32 33 - 40 41 - 48 49 - 56 57 - 64 65 - 72 73 - 80 81 - 88 89 - 96 ES , V 5( B IP -2 ) , L a st 96 15 - Mi n I nt e r va l : > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -
- -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - -
6.19.5.3 7-Day Perf. Report

Press 3 from the Unit Performance Display menu to display 7-day performance report. See also below screen shows. For E1:
U n i t A - E1 == U n i t 7 -D a ys Pe r f. Re po r t S e le c ti o n = = 2 0: 25 : 2 3 0 8/ 1 0/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e P a r am e te r Type C h a nn e l# : U S ER : : V 5 (B IP - 2 ) : 01
89
U n i t A - E1 = = = U ni t 7 - Da y s P er f. R ep o rt == = 1 9: 43 : 5 1 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4 U S E R V 5( B IP - 2) Ch a nn el # 2 - - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 1 (E S ) ( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l : 13 4 0 1 33 1 05 / 06 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -05 / 05 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -05 / 04 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -05 / 03 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -05 / 02 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -05 / 01 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -04 / 30 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - --
For T1:
Unit -T1 == U n i t 7 -D a ys Pe r f. Re po r t S e le c ti o n = = 1 3: 16 : 3 0 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e P a r am e te r Type C h a nn e l# : U S ER : : V 5 (B IP - 2 ) : 21
90
Unit -T1 = = = U ni t 7 - Da y s P er f. R ep o rt == = 1 3: 28 : 0 1 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 U S E R V 5( B IP - 2) Ch a nn el # 2 1 - - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 0 (E S ) ( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -09 / 02 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -09 / 01 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -08 / 31 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -08 / 30 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -08 / 29 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -08 / 28 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -08 / 27 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - --
91
6.19.6 Unit Diagnostics Display

Press K from the Unit Menu to diagnostics display. See also below screen shows.
U n i t A - E1 = == Li n e D ia g no s ti cs D is p la y = = = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT 0 0: 23 : 0 9 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
E1# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
* OF F * OF F * OF F * OF F * OF F * OF F * OF F * OF F * OF F * OF F * OF F * OF F * OF F * OF F
Lo o pb a ck L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B
No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
Te s tP a tt e rn T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n
E 1# 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
*O F F *O F F *O F F *O F F *O F F *O F F *O F F *O F F *O F F *O F F *O F F *O F F *O F F *O F F
L o op b ac k LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB
T e st P at t er n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n
U n i t A - T1 = == Li n e D ia g no s ti cs D is p la y = = = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT
0 0: 23 : 0 9 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
E1# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Lo o pb a ck L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B
Te s tP a tt e rn T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n
E 1# 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
L o op b ac k LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB LO C L LB
T e st P at t er n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n T es t Pa t te r n
92
6.19.7 TSA Setup

Press T from the Unit Menu to do TSA setup. See also below screen shows. For E1:
Unit A - E1 == = T S A S et up = == 1 0: 39 : 1 0 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
A - > T S A E nt e r B - > C h an n el TS A D e le t e
For T1:
Unit B - T1 == = T S A S et up = == 1 3: 17 : 1 0 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
93
6.19.7.1 TSA Enter

Press A from the T SA Setup submenu to do T SA setup. See also below screen shows. NOTE: P.P.A/D(W)means Path Protect Add/ Drop (West Side); P.P.A/D(E)means Path Protect Add/ Drop (East Side). For E1:
U n i t A - E1 T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct TS A m ap # : S ta r t E 1 C ha n : C ou n t o f C ha n : S t a rt TU 1 2 C ha n : T S A T yp e : [ m a p1 ] - Ea s t T U 1 2# 0 1~ 2 1: o T U 1 2# 2 2~ 4 2: o T U 1 2# 4 3~ 6 3: o [ m a p1 ] - We s t T U 1 2# 0 1~ 2 1: o T U 1 2# 2 2~ 4 2: o T U 1 2# 4 3~ 6 3: o m ap 1 01 01 01 P .P .A / D (E ) == = T S A E nt er = == 1 0: 39 : 2 6 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
[ t u g3 # 1, tu g2 # 1 , t u1 2 #1 ]
s id e x o o o o o s id e x o o o o o
T U1 2 ch a nn e ls o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o T U1 2 ch a nn e ls o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
av a il a bl e f o r o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o av a il a bl e f o r o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
a dd : o o o o o o o o o a dd : o o o o o o o o o
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
For T1:
U n i t B - T1 T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct TS A m ap # : S ta r t T 1 C ha n : C ou n t o f C ha n : S t a rt TU 1 2 C ha n : T S A T yp e : [ m a p1 ] - Ea s t T U 1 2# 0 1~ 2 1: o T U 1 2# 2 2~ 4 2: o T U 1 2# 4 3~ 6 3: o [ m a p1 ] - We s t T U 1 2# 0 1~ 2 1: o T U 1 2# 2 2~ 4 2: o T U 1 2# 4 3~ 6 3: o m ap 1 01 01 01 E AS T A / D == = T S A E nt er = == 1 3: 17 : 1 8 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
[ t u g3 # 1, tu g2 # 1 , t u1 2 #1 ]
s id e o o o o o o s id e o o o o o o
94
6.19.7.2 Channel TSA Delete

Press B from the TSA Setup submenu to delete T SA channel. See also below screen shows. T his menu is used to delete assigned channels. For E1:
U n i t A - E1 T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct Ma p # S lo t # St a rt E1 Ch a n Co u nt of Ch a n : : : : m ap 1 A 01 01 == = T S A D el et e == = 1 0: 11 : 5 6 1 0/ 0 4/ 2 00 5
E 1 # T U 12 t y pe 01 1 P .P . A/ D (E ) 02 2 P .P . A/ D (E ) 03 3 P .P . A/ D (E ) 04 4 P .P . A/ D (E ) 05 5 P .P . A/ D (E ) 06 6 P .P . A/ D (E ) 07 7 P .P . A/ D (E ) 08 8 P .P . A/ D (E )
E 1# 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
T U1 2 t yp e 9 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 0 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 1 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 2 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 3 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 4 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 5 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 6 P. P .A / D( E )
E 1# 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
T U1 2 t yp e 1 7 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 8 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 9 P. P .A / D( E ) 2 0 P. P .A / D( E ) 2 1 P. P .A / D( E ) 2 2 P. P .A / D( E ) 2 3 P. P .A / D( E ) 2 4 P. P .A / D( E )
E 1# 25 26 27 28
T U 1 2 ty p e 2 5 P . P. A /D ( E) 2 6 P . P. A /D ( E) 2 7 P . P. A /D ( E) 2 8 P . P. A /D ( E)
For T1:
U n i t A - T1 T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct Ma p # S lo t # St a rt T1 Ch a n Co u nt of Ch a n : : : : m ap 1 A 01 01 == = T S A D el et e == = 1 0: 13 : 3 0 1 0/ 0 4/ 2 00 5
T 1 # T U 12 t y pe 01 1 P .P . A/ D (E ) 02 2 P .P . A/ D (E ) 03 3 P .P . A/ D (E ) 04 4 P .P . A/ D (E ) 05 5 P .P . A/ D (E ) 06 6 P .P . A/ D (E ) 07 7 P .P . A/ D (E ) 08 8 P .P . A/ D (E )
T 1# 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
T U1 2 t yp e 9 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 0 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 1 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 2 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 3 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 4 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 5 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 6 P. P .A / D( E )
T 1# 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
T U1 2 t yp e 1 7 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 8 P. P .A / D( E ) 1 9 P. P .A / D( E ) 2 0 P. P .A / D( E ) 2 1 P. P .A / D( E ) 2 2 P. P .A / D( E ) 2 3 P. P .A / D( E ) 2 4 P. P .A / D( E )
T 1# 25 26 27 28
T U 1 2 ty p e 2 5 P . P. A /D ( E) 2 6 P . P. A /D ( E) 2 7 P . P. A /D ( E) 2 8 P . P. A /D ( E)
95
6.19.8 Config Setup

Press C from the Unit Menu to do system setup. See also below screen shows. For E1:
Unit A - E1 = == Co n fi g S et u p = = = 1 6: 26 : 4 5 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
H -> C ha n ne l L i ne In t er fa c e S e tu p S -> C ha n ne l P a th Ov e rh ea d Se t up I -> C us t om e r i nf o rm a ti on S et u p
For T1:
Unit B - T1 = == Co n fi g S et u p = = = 1 3: 18 : 1 9 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
H -> C ha n ne l L i ne In t er fa c e S e tu p S -> C ha n ne l P a th Ov e rh ea d Se t up I -> C us t om e r i nf o rm a ti on S et u p
96
6.19.8.1 Channel Line Interface Setup

Press H from the Config Setup submenu to do line interface setup. See also below screen shows. For E1:
U n i t A - E1 = = = L in e I n te r fa ce S et u p = == A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S 0 1: 36 : 2 2 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
E1# 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Co d in g HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3 HD B 3
E 1# 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
C o di n g H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3 H D B3
For T 1:
U n i t B - T1 = = = L in e I n te r fa ce S et u p = == A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S 1 3: 18 : 2 8 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
T1# 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Co d in g B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S B8 Z S
c ab l e le n g th 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft 0 ~ 13 3 ft
T 1# 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
C o di n g B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS B 8 ZS
ca b le le ng t h 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t 0 ~1 3 3f t
97
6.19.8.2 Channel Path Overhead Setup

T his menu is used to set up J2 byte transm ission of regenerator section overhead. Press S from the Config Setup submenu to do path overhead setup. See also below screen shows. For E1:
U n i t A - E1 = = = P at h O v er h ea d S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S C h a nn e l S el e ct i on : 01 J 2 _L E N : 1 6 E x pe c te d _J 2 _M S G : L oo p T X _J 2 _M S G : L oo p 0 1: 37 : 0 0 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
NOTE: HP_EPSL (High Path_Expected Path Signal Label),LEN(length),MSG(message)
For T1:
U n i t A - T1 = = = P at h O v er h ea d S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , B A CK S PA C E t o e di t, E SC to ab o rt C h a nn e l S el e ct i on : 01 J 2 _L E N : 1 6 E x pe c te d _J 2 _M S G : L oo p T X _J 2 _M S G : L oo p 0 1: 37 : 0 0 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
98
6.19.8.3 Customer Information Setup

Press I from the Config Setup submenu to edit customer information. See also below screen shows. For E1
U n i t A - E1 == = E1 Cu s to m er In f or ma t i on Se t up == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , B A CK S PA C E t o e di t, E SC to ab o rt 1 6: 27 : 0 1 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
E1# 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Cu s to m er In f or ma t i on E1 - Li n e E1 - Li n e E1 - Li n e E1 - Li n e E1 - Li n e E1 - Li n e E1 - Li n e E1 - Li n e E1 - Li n e E1 - Li n e E1 - Li n e E1 - Li n e E1 - Li n e E1 - Li n e
E1 # 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
C u st m or In f or m at ti o n E 1 -L i ne E 1 -L i ne E 1 -L i ne E 1 -L i ne E 1 -L i ne E 1 -L i ne E 1 -L i ne E 1 -L i ne E 1 -L i ne E 1 -L i ne E 1 -L i ne E 1 -L i ne E 1 -L i ne E 1 -L i ne
For T1
U n it A -T 1 = = = T 1 C u st o me r I n fo rm a t io n S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , B A CK S PA C E t o e di t, E SC to ab o rt 16 :3 3 : 54 09 / 20 / 20 0 5
T1# 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Cu s to m er In f or ma t i on T1 - Li n e T1 - Li n e T1 - Li n e T1 - Li n e T1 - Li n e T1 - Li n e T1 - Li n e T1 - Li n e T1 - Li n e T1 - Li n e T1 - Li n e T1 - Li n e T1 - Li n e T1 - Li n e
T1 # 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
C u st m or In f or m at io n T 1 -L i ne T 1 -L i ne T 1 -L i ne T 1 -L i ne T 1 -L i ne T 1 -L i ne T 1 -L i ne T 1 -L i ne T 1 -L i ne T 1 -L i ne T 1 -L i ne T 1 -L i ne T 1 -L i ne T 1 -L i ne
99
6.19.9 Unit Loopback & Diagnostics Setup

Press G from the Unit menu to setup lookback and diagnostics
Unit A - E1 = = = L o op b ac k & Di a gn os t i cs Se t up == = 0 0: 24 : 3 6 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
A -> C ha n ne l L o op b ac k S et u p B -> U ni t D i ag n os t ic s S et u p
6.19.9.1 Channel Loopback Setup

Press A from the lookback and diagnostics submenu to do channel loopback setup. See also below screen shows. For E1:
U n i t A - E1 = == Li n e L oo p ba ck T es t = = = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT 1 4: 49 : 2 5 0 9/ 0 1/ 2 00 4
E1# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC
L LB L LB L LB L LB L LB L LB L LB L LB L LB L LB L LB L LB L LB L LB
E 1# 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C
100
For T1:
U n i t B - T1 = == Li n e L oo p ba ck T es t = = = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT 1 3: 19 : 1 7 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
T1# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC L OC
T 1# 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C LO C
6.19.9.2 Unit Diagnostics Setup

Press B from the lookback and diagnostics to setup diagnostics. See also below screen shows. T he current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*). For E1:
U n i t A - E1 == = U n it Di a gn os t i cs == = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT S e nd Te s t P at t er n t o = = > E1 # : 01 0 1: 38 : 4 1 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
D i r ec t io n
: *S T M- 1 s i de OFF * 2^ 1 5- 1
Li n e s id e 2 ^2 0 -1
T E S T p at t er n :
S Y N C S ta t e : E r r or Se c on d = T o t al Se c on d =
S YN C 0 0
101
For T 1:
U n i t A - T1 == = U n it Di a gn os t i cs == = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT S e nd Te s t P at t er n t o = = > T1 # : 01 0 1: 38 : 4 1 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
D i r ec t io n
: *S T M- 1 s i de OFF * 2^ 1 5- 1
Li n e s id e 2 ^2 0 -1
S YN C 0 0
6.19.10
Unit Alarm Setup
Press M from the Unit Menu to do alarm setup. See also below screen shows. For E1:
O 9 1 00 - CO = == E1 LO S A l ar m S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S 1 0: 40 : 2 3 0 4/ 1 2/ 2 00 4
E1# 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
al a rm EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
r e la y DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS
se v e ri t y MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R
E1 # 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
a l ar m EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
r el a y D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS
se ve r i ty MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR
102

O 9 1 00 = == T1 LO S A l ar m S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S 1 3: 21 : 3 4 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
T1# 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
al a rm EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
r e la y DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS DIS
se v e ri t y MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R
T1 # 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
a l ar m EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
r el a y D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS D IS
se ve r i ty MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR MA JR
6.19.11
Unit Performance Setup/ Clear
Press R from the Unit Menu to do performance setup or clear performance. See also below screen shows. For E1:
Unit A - E1 = = = U N IT PE R FO R MA N CE S e t up / Cl e ar == = 1 9: 44 : 2 1 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4
C - > U n it Cl e ar P e r fo r ma n ce Da t a D - > U n it Pe r fo rm a n ce Th r es h ol d S e tu p
103
For T1:
Unit -T1 = = = U N IT PE R FO R MA N CE S e t up / Cl e ar == = 1 3: 21 : 4 5 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
6.19.11.1 Clear Performance Data

Press C from the Unit Performance Setup/Clear submenu to clear performance data, then press Y or N to confirm it. See also below screen shows. For E1:
Unit A - E1 = = = U N IT PE R FO R MA N CE S e t up / Cl e ar == = 1 9: 44 : 2 1 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4
104
For T1:
Unit -T1 = = = U N IT PE R FO R MA N CE S e t up / Cl e ar == = 1 3: 21 : 4 8 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
6.19.11.2 Performance Thershold Setup

Press D from the Unit Performance Setup/Clear submenu to set up performance threshold. See also below screen shows. For E1:
U n i t A - E1 = == U NI T P e rf o rm a nc e T hr e s ho l d S et u p = == 1 9: 44 : 4 1 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S M o n it o r P oi n t V5 CV En / Di s EN EN s ev e ri t y I NF O I NF O Th r es h ol d 06 0 0 08 0 5
105
For T1:
Unit -T1 = == U NI T P e rf o rm a nc e T hr e s ho l d S et u p = == 1 3: 22 : 0 2 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S M o n it o r P oi n t V5 CV En / Di s EN EN s ev e ri t y I NF O I NF O Th r es h ol d 06 0 0 15 4 4
6.19.12
Clear Unit Alarm History
Press X from the Unit Menu to clear alarm history, then press Y or N to confirm it. See also below screen shows. For E1:
[ D I SP L AY ] N - > T SA Se t ti n g D is pl a y S - > C ur r en t T S A S ta tu s D - > C on f ig Di s pl a y A - > C ur r en t A l ar m S ta t u s P - > P er f or m an c e
[ SE T U P] T - > TS A S e tu p C - > Co n fi g S e tu p G - > Un i t D ia g no s ti c s Se t u p M - > Un i t A la r m S et u p R - > Pe r fo r ma n ce Se t up /C l e ar
> > Cl e ar al a rm qu e ue o f UN I T
A - a r e y ou s u r e ? [ Y /N ]
106
For T1:
Unit B - T1 == = U n it Me nu = == 1 3: 22 : 1 0 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 H W Ve r si o n : C
B - a r e y ou s u r e ? [ Y /N ]
6.19.13
Unit Load Default
Press W from the Unit Menu to load default, then press Y or N to confirm it. See also below screen shows. For E1:
> > A re yo u s u re (Y / N) ?
107
For T1:
Unit B - T1 == = U n it Me nu = == 1 3: 22 : 1 0 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 H W Ve r si o n : C
6.20 Unit Menu - E3/ T3

Press U from the Controller Menu to enter into the Unit Menu. See also below screen shows. For E3:
Unit D - E3 == = U n it Me nu = == 0 0: 25 : 4 0 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5 H W Ve r si o n : E
[ D I SP L AY ] N - > T SA Se t ti n g D is pl a y S - > C ur r en t T S A S ta tu s A - > C ur r en t A l ar m S ta t u s P - > P er f or m an c e K - > D ia g no s ti c s D is pl a y
[ SE T U P] T - > TS A S e tu p C - > Co n fi g S e tu p G - > Lo o pb a ck & D ia g no st i c s S et u p L - > Un i t A la r m S et u p R - > Pe r fo r ma n ce Se t up /C l e ar
108
For T 3: W hen the user setup T3 interface, should use co model.

Unit D - T3 == = U n it Me nu = == 0 9: 19 : 0 2 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 4 H W Ve r si o n : A
[ D I SP L AY ] N - > T SA Se t ti n g D is pl a y S - > C ur r en t T S A S ta tu s A - > C ur r en t A l ar m S ta t u s P - > P er f or m an c e
[ SE T U P] T - > TS A S e tu p C - > Co n fi g S e tu p G - > P3 M 3 D ia g no s ti c s Se t u p L - > Un i t A la r m S et u p R - > Pe r fo r ma n ce Se t up /C l e ar

Press N from the Unit Menu to display TSA setting. See also below screen shows. NOTE: P.P.A/D(W)means Path Protect Add/ Drop (West Side); P.P.A/D(E)means Path Protect Add/ Drop (East Side). For E3:
Unit D - E3 = == Un i t T SA Se t ti ng D is p la y = = = 0 9: 21 : 4 5 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 4
- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -m a p1 -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - E 3 # T U3 t yp e 01 01 E AS T A / D 02 02 E AS T A / D 03 03 E AS T A / D
- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- m ap 2 -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -E 3# TU 3 ty p e 01 . 02 . 03 .
109
For T3:
Unit D - T3 = == Un i t T SA Se t ti ng D is p la y = = = 0 9: 21 : 4 5 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 4
- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -m a p1 -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - T 3 # T U3 t yp e 01 01 P .P . A/ D (E ) 02 . 03 .
- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- m ap 2 -- -- - - -- - -- - -- - -T 3# TU 3 ty p e 01 . 02 . 03 .

Press S from the Unit Menu to display the current TSA status. See also below screen shows. For E3:
Unit D - E3 = == Cu r re n t T SA S t a tu s = = = 1 1: 43 : 5 6 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
E3# 01 02 03
ad d /d r op st a tu s Ea s t D ro p , E as t A d d Ea s t D ro p , E as t A d d Ea s t D ro p , E as t A d d
110
For T3:
Unit D - T3 = == Cu r re n t T SA S t a tu s = = = 0 9: 22 : 0 4 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 4
T3# 01 02 03
ad d /d r op st a tu s Ea s t D ro p , E as t& W e st Ad d . .

Press A from the Unit Menu to display the current alarm status. See also below screen shows. For E3:
Unit D - E3 = == Un i t A la r m St a t us == = [ P OR T #0 2 ] - T U 3# 2 E W T U 3- L OP : N o NA T U 3- A IS : N o NA T U 3- R DI : N o NA T U 3- P LM : N o NA L P -B I P : 0 NA L P -R E I : 0 NA L I NE - LO S : Yes L I NE - AI S : No L I NE - CV : NA 1 1: 44 : 0 8 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 [ P O RT # 01 ] - TU 3 #1 E W T U 3 -L O P : N o NA T U 3 -A I S : N o NA T U 3 -R D I : N o NA T U 3 -P L M : N o NA L P - BI P : 0 NA L P - RE I : 0 NA L I N E- L OS : Ye s L I N E- A IS : No L I N E- C V : NA [ PO R T# 0 3] - TU 3 # 3 E W T U3 - LO P : No NA T U3 - AI S : No NA T U3 - RD I : No NA T U3 - PL M : No NA L P- B IP : 0 NA L P- R EI : 0 NA L IN E -L O S: Ye s L IN E -A I S: No L IN E -C V : NA
111
For T3:
Unit D - T3 = == Un i t A la r m St a t us == = [ P OR T #0 2 ] T U 3- L OP : T U 3- A IS : T U 3- R DI : T U 3- P LM : L P -B I P : L P -R E I : L I NE - LO S : L I NE - AI S : L I NE - CV : E NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA W NA NA NA NA NA NA [ PO R T# 0 3] T U3 - LO P : T U3 - AI S : T U3 - RD I : T U3 - PL M : L P- B IP : L P- R EI : L IN E -L O S: L IN E -A I S: L IN E -C V : E NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA W NA NA NA NA NA NA 0 9: 22 : 2 4 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 4 [ P O RT # 01 ] - TU 3 #1 E W T U 3 -L O P : N o No T U 3 -A I S : Y e s Yes T U 3 -R D I : N o No T U 3 -P L M : N o No L P - BI P : 0 0 L P - RE I : 0 0 L I N E- L OS : Ye s L I N E- A IS : No L I N E- C V : NA
6.20.4 Unit Performance Display

Press P from the Unit Menu to display perform ance report. See also below screen shows. For E3:
Unit D - E3 = == UN I T P ER F OR M AN CE D is p la y = = = 1 1: 44 : 2 3 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
112
For T3:
Unit -T 3 = = = U NI T P E RF O RM A NC E D i sp l ay == = 2 0: 21 : 5 7 0 8/ 2 1/ 2 00 4

Press 1 from the Unit Performance Display menu to display 1-hour performance report. See also below screen shows. Two options for "Register Type": USER or LINE, and two options for "Type": LP-B3 or CV. For E3:
U n i t D - E3 == U n i t 1 -h o ur Pe r f. Re po r t S e le c ti o n = = 1 1: 44 : 3 3 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e : U S ER Type P 3 M 3 P or t # : L P -B 3 : 1
113
Press ENT ER from the above screen to display the detail report.
U n i t D - E3 = = = U ni t 1 - Ho u r P er f. R ep o rt == = 1 1: 46 : 3 7 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 U S E R L P- B 3 C ha n ne l #1 - - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 9 8 s e co n ds (E S ) ( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al : 0 0 0 0 1s t N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0 0 0 0 2n d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0 0 0 0 3r d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0 0 0 0 4t h N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : 0 0 0 0
For T 3:
U n i t D - T3 == U n i t 1 -h o ur Pe r f. Re po r t S e le c ti o n = = 1 1: 44 : 3 3 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e : U S ER Type P 3 M 3 P or t # : L P -B 3 : 1
114
Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Press ENT ER from the above screen to display the detail report.
U n i t -T 3 = = = U ni t 1 - Ho u r P er f. R ep o rt == = 2 0: 21 : 5 7 0 8/ 2 1/ 2 00 4 U S E R L P- B 3 C ha n ne l #0 - - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 5 3 6 s ec o nd s (E S ) ( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al : 5 0 0 5 1s t N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -2n d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -3r d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -4t h N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - --

Press 2 from the Unit Performance Display m enu to display 24-hour performance report. See also below screen shows. For E3:
U n i t D - E3 == U n i t 2 4- h ou r P e rf . R ep o r t S el e ct i on == 1 1: 47 : 4 1 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e P a r am e te r Type P 3 M 3 P or t # : : : : L I NE AS CV 2
115
U n i t D - E3 = = = U ni t 2 4 -H o ur Pe rf . Re p or t = = = L I N E A S CV Ch a nn e l# 2 - - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 1 7 1 s ec o nd s - - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 9 (A S ) ( EF S ) ( EB ) Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al : 0 0 0 Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l : 28 28 0 - - LI N E, 01 - 08 09 - 16 17 - 24 25 - 32 33 - 40 41 - 48 49 - 56 57 - 64 65 - 72 73 - 80 81 - 88 89 - 96 AS , C V, La st > 0 0 > 28 - -- -> - -- - - - -- -> - -- - - - -- -> - -- - - - -- -> - -- - - - -- -> - -- - - - -- -> - -- - - - -- -> - -- - - - -- -> - -- - - - -- -> - -- - - - -- -> - -- - - - -- -9 6 1 5- M in In t er v al : 0 0 0 0 - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - 1 1: 47 : 5 1 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
0 - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - -
0 - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - -
For T 3:
U n i t D - T3 == U n i t 2 4- h ou r P e rf . R ep o r t S el e ct i on == 1 1: 47 : 4 1 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e P a r am e te r Type P 3 M 3 P or t # : : : : L I NE AS CV 2
116
U n i t -T 3 = = = U ni t 2 4 -H o ur Pe rf . Re p or t = = = 2 0: 22 : 1 3 0 8/ 2 1/ 2 00 4 U S E R E S LP - B3 Ch a nn el # 0 - - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 5 5 1 s ec o nd s - - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 0 (E S ) ( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al : 0 20 0 0 Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -- - US E R, 01 - 08 09 - 16 17 - 24 25 - 32 33 - 40 41 - 48 49 - 56 57 - 64 65 - 72 73 - 80 81 - 88 89 - 96 ES , L P- B 3, L a s t 9 6 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - 1 5- M in In t er va l : - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - -
- -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - -
- -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - -

Press 3 from the Unit Performance Display menu to display 7-day performance report. See also below screen shows. For E3:
U n i t D - E3 == U n i t 7 -D a ys Pe r f. Re po r t S e le c ti o n = = 1 1: 48 : 0 2 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e P a r am e te r Type P 3 M 3 P or t # : L I NE : : CV : 2
117
U n i t D - E3 = = = U ni t 7 - Da y s P er f. R ep o rt == = 1 1: 48 : 1 7 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 L I N E C V C ha n ne l #2 - - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 9 (E S ) ( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l : 0 8 07 2 0 0 09 / 02 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -09 / 01 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -08 / 31 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -08 / 30 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -08 / 29 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -08 / 28 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -08 / 27 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - --
For T 3:
U n i t D - T3 == U n i t 7 -D a ys Pe r f. Re po r t S e le c ti o n = = 1 1: 48 : 0 2 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e P a r am e te r Type P 3 M 3 P or t # : L I NE : : CV : 2
118
U n i t -T 3 = = = U ni t 7 - Da y s P er f. R ep o rt == = 2 0: 22 : 2 6 0 8/ 2 1/ 2 00 4 U S E R L P- B 3 C ha n ne l #0 - - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 0 (E S ) ( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -08 / 20 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -08 / 19 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -08 / 18 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -08 / 17 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -08 / 16 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -08 / 15 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -08 / 14 / 20 0 4 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - --
6.20.5 Diagnostics Display

Press K from the Unit Menu to do Diagnostics display. See also below screen shows. For E3:
U n i t D - E3 = == Li n e D ia g no s ti cs D is p la y = = = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT 0 0: 25 : 2 9 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
E3# 1 2 3
* OF F * OF F * OF F
Lo o pb a ck L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B
Te s tP a tt e rn N o T e st P at t er n N o T e st P at t er n N o T e st P at t er n
119
For T3:
U n i t D - T3 = == Li n e D ia g no s ti cs D is p la y = = = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT 0 0: 25 : 2 9 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
T3# 1 2 3
Lo o pb a ck L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B
Te s tP a tt e rn N o T e st P at t er n N o T e st P at t er n N o T e st P at t er n
6.20.6 TSA Setup

Press T from the Unit Menu to do TSA setup. See also below screen shows. For E3:
Unit D - E3 == = T S A S et up = == 1 1: 48 : 4 3 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
120

Unit D - T3 == = T S A S et up = == 0 9: 19 : 5 9 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 4
6.20.6.1 TSA Enter

Press A from the T SA Setup submenu to do T SA setup. See also below screen shows. NOTE: P.P.A/D(W)means Path Protect Add/ Drop (West Side); P.P.A/D(E)means Path Protect Add/ Drop (East Side). For E3:
U n i t D - E3 T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct TS A m ap # : S ta r t E 3 C ha n : C ou n t o f C ha n : S t ar t T U 3 C ha n : T S A T yp e : [ m a p1 ] - Ea s t T U 3 #0 1 ~0 3 : x [ m a p1 ] - We s t T U 3 #0 1 ~0 3 : o m ap 1 1 1 1 E AS T A / D == = T S A E nt er = == 1 1: 48 : 5 5 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
s id e T U3 c ha n ne l s a va i la b le f o r a d d: x x s id e T U3 c ha n ne l s a va i la b le f o r a d d: o o
121
For T3:
U n i t D - T3 T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct TS A m ap # : S ta r t T 3 C ha n : C ou n t o f C ha n : S t ar t T U 3 C ha n : T S A T yp e : [ m a p1 ] - Ea s t T U 3 #0 1 ~0 3 : o [ m a p1 ] - We s t T U 3 #0 1 ~0 3 : o m ap 1 1 1 1 P .P .A / D (E ) == = T S A E nt er = == 0 9: 20 : 3 2 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 4
s id e T U3 c ha n ne l s a va i la b le f o r a d d: o o s id e T U3 c ha n ne l s a va i la b le f o r a d d: o o
6.20.6.2 Channel TSA Delete

Press B from the TSA Setup submenu to delete T SA channel. See also below screen shows. T his menu is used to delete assigned channels. For E3:
U n i t D - E3 T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct Ma p # S lo t # St a rt E3 Ch a n Co u nt of Ch a n : : : : m ap 1 D 1 1 == = T S A D el et e == = 1 0: 16 : 5 5 1 0/ 0 4/ 2 00 5
E 3 # T U3 t yp e 01 2 P .P . A/ D (E ) 02 . 03 .
122
For T3:
U n i t B - T3 T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct Ma p # S lo t # St a rt T3 Ch a n Co u nt of Ch a n : : : : m ap 1 B 1 1 == = T S A D el et e == = 1 0: 16 : 2 4 1 0/ 0 4/ 2 00 5
T 3 # T U3 t yp e 01 1 P .P . A/ D (E ) 02 . 03 .
6.20.7 Config Setup

Press C from the Unit Menu to do system setup. See also below screen shows. For E3:
Unit C - E3 = == Co n fi g S et u p = = = 1 6: 35 : 1 3 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
T - > T ra n sm i t C 2 Se t u p I - > C us t om e r i nf or m a ti o n S et u p
123
For T3:
Unit D - T3 = == Co n fi g S et u p = = = 1 6: 36 : 3 3 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
H - > T ra n sm i t L en gt h Se t up T - > T ra n sm i t C 2 Se t u p I - > C us t om e r i nf or m a ti o n S et u p
6.20.7.1 Transmit Length Setup

Press H from the Config Setup submenu to do line interface setup. See also below screen shows. NOTE: "Transmit Length Setup" is available for T3 interface only. For T 3:
U n i t D - T3 == = T r an s mi t L e ng th S et u p = == A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S 0 9: 29 : 2 2 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 4
T3# 01 02 03
tr a ns m it le n gt h 22 5 ~4 5 0f t 22 5 ~4 5 0f t 22 5 ~4 5 0f t
124
6.20.7.2 Transmit C2 Setup

T his menu is used to set up C2 byte of high-order path overhead. Higher-Order Path Overhead - C2 Path Signal Label
Press T from the Config Setup submenu to set up C2 transmition. See also below screen shows. For E3:
U n i t D - E3 = == Tr a ns m it C2 S e t up == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S 1 1: 51 : 3 1 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
E3# 01 02 03
tr a ns m it C2 0_ 0 0
125
For T3:
U n i t B - T3 = == Tr a ns m it C2 S e t up == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S 1 4: 51 : 0 8 0 9/ 0 1/ 2 00 4
T3# 01 02 03
tr a ns m it C2 4_ 0 0

Press I from the Config Setup submenu to edit customer information. See also below screen shows. For E3:
U n i t C - E3 = = = E 3 C u st o me r I n fo rm a t io n S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , B A CK S PA C E t o e di t, E SC to ab o rt 16 :3 5 : 25 09 / 20 / 20 0 5
E3# 01 02 03
Cu s to m er In f or ma t i on E3 - Li n e E3 - Li n e E3 - Li n e
126
For T 3:
U n i t D - T3 = = = T 3 C u st o me r I n fo rm a t io n S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , B A CK S PA C E t o e di t, E SC to ab o rt 16 :3 6 : 48 09 / 20 / 20 0 5
T3# 01 02 03
Cu s to m er In f or ma t i on T3 - Li n e T3 - Li n e T3 - Li n e
6.20.8 Unit Loopback & Diagnostics Setup

Press G from the Unit Menu to setup P3M3 loopback &diagnostics
Unit D - E3 = = = L o op b ac k & Di a gn os t i cs Se t up == = 0 0: 26 : 1 6 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
A -> C ha n ne l L o op b ac k S et u p B -> U ni t D i ag n os t ic s S et u p
127
6.20.8.1 P3M3 Loopback Setup

P3M 3: 3-channel plesiochronous level 3 mapper Press A from the Loopback &Diagnostics Setup subm enu to set up loopback for T3 or E3 interface. See also below screen shows. LOC for local looback, LLB for line loopback. For E3:
U n i t D - E3 = == P3 M 3 L oo p ba ck T es t = = = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT 1 1: 51 : 0 2 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
E3# 1 2 3
L OC L OC L OC
L LB L LB L LB
For T3:
U n i t D - T3 = == P3 M 3 L oo p ba ck T es t = = = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT 0 9: 29 : 4 6 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 4
T3# 1 2 3
L OC L OC L OC
L LB L LB L LB
128
6.20.8.2 Unit Diagnostics Setup

Press B from the Loopback &Diagnostics Setup to setup diagnostics. See also below screen shows. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*). For E3:
U n i t D - E3 == = P 3 M3 Di a gn os t i cs == = 1 1: 52 : 4 6 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: 1~ 3, B AC K SP A CE to ed i t S e nd Te s t P at t er n t o = = > E3 # : 3_
For T3:
U n i t D - T3 == = P 3 M3 Di a gn os t i cs == = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT S e nd Te s t P at t er n t o = = > T3 # : 1 0 9: 30 : 0 9 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 4
D i r ec t io n
: ST M -1 s i d e 2^ 1 5- 1 2 ^2 0 -1
T E S T p at t er n : *O F F
129
6.20.9 Unit Alarm Setup

Press L from the Unit Menu to do alarm setup. See also below screen shows. For E3:
U n i t D - E3 = = = E 3 L in e A l ar m S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S P o r t# 1 1 2 2 3 3 t y pe LOS AIS LOS AIS LOS AIS a l ar m E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D r el a y D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D se v er it y MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R 1 1: 53 : 1 1 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
For T 3:
U n i t D - T3 = = = T 3 L in e A l ar m S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S P o r t# 1 1 2 2 3 3 t y pe LOS AIS LOS AIS LOS AIS a l ar m E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D E N AB LE D r el a y D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D D IS A BL E D se v er it y MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R MA J R 0 9: 23 : 4 4 0 8/ 2 7/ 2 00 4
130
6.20.10
Uint Performance Setup/ Clear
Press R from the Unit Menu to do performance setup or clear performance. See also below screen shows. For E3:
Unit D - E3 = = = U N IT PE R FO R MA N CE S e t up / Cl e ar == = 1 1: 53 : 3 0 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
For T3:
Unit D - T3 = = = U N IT PE R FO R MA N CE S e t up / Cl e ar == = 1 1: 53 : 3 0 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
131
6.20.10.1 Clear Performance Data

Press C from the Unit Performance Setup/Clear submenu to clear performance data, then press Y or N to confirm it. See also below screen shows. For E3:
Unit D - E3 = = = U N IT PE R FO R MA N CE S e t up / Cl e ar == = 1 1: 53 : 3 4 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4
For T3:
Unit D - T3 = = = U N IT PE R FO R MA N CE S e t up / Cl e ar == = 1 9: 44 : 2 1 0 5/ 0 7/ 2 00 4
132
6.20.10.2 Performance Threshold Setup

Press D from the Unit Performance Setup/Clear submenu to set up performance threshold. See also below screen shows. For E3:
U n i t D - E3 = == U NI T P e rf o rm a nc e T hr e s ho l d S et u p = == 1 1: 53 : 5 2 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: 1~ 99 9 9 , B AC K SP A CE to ed it M o n it o r P oi n t LP - B3 CV En / Di s EN EN s ev e ri t y I NF O I NF O Th r es h ol d 24 0 0 06 0 0
For T3:
U n i t -T 3 = == U NI T P e rf o rm a nc e T hr e s ho l d S et u p = == 2 0: 13 : 0 5 0 8/ 2 1/ 2 00 4 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S M o n it o r P oi n t LP - B3 CV En / Di s EN EN s ev e ri t y I NF O I NF O Th r es h ol d 24 0 0 06 0 0
133
6.20.11
Press X from the Unit Menu to clear alarm history, then press Y or N to confirm it. See also below screen shows. For E3:
Unit D - E3 == = U n it Me nu = == 1 1: 55 : 1 8 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 H W Ve r si o n : A
D - a r e y ou s u r e ? [ Y /N ]
For T3:
A - a r e y ou s u r e ? [ Y /N ]
134
6.20.12
Unit Load Default
Press W from the Unit Menu to load default, then press Y or N to confirm it. See also below screen shows. For E3:
Unit D - E3 == = U n it Me nu = == 1 1: 55 : 1 8 0 9/ 0 3/ 2 00 4 H W Ve r si o n : A
For T3:
135
6.21 Unit Menu - Ethernet

Press U from the Controller Menu to enter into the Unit Menu. See also below screen shows. NOTE: There are two kinds of "Unit Menu" for Ethernet module: one for Ethernet without sw itch module (see also the first below screen), the other one for Ethernet w ith swtich module (see also the second below screen). For Ethernet w ithout Swtich:
Unit D - Et h er n et == = U n it Me nu = == 1 6: 35 : 4 0 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5 H W Ve r si o n : B
[ D I SP L AY ] N - > T SA Se t ti n g D is pl a y S - > C ur r en t T S A S ta tu s L - > L CA S c h an de l et in g St a tu s A - > C ur r en t A l ar m S ta t u s P - > P er f or m an c e C - > V CG St a tu s
[ SE T U P] T - > TS A S e tu p H - > Co n fi g S e tu p R - > Pe r fo r ma n ce Se t up /C l e ar G - > L o op b ac k & Di a gn os t i cs Se t up
For Ethernet w ith Sw tich: If Swtich is available for Ethernet m odule, its "Unit Menu" will show 6 options as below: Under [DISPLAY], "I" for Switch Status, and "Q" for Unit Bridge Info Display; under [SETUP], "M" for Mode Setup, "D" for Switch Qos Setup, "B" for Unit Bridge Info Setup, and "V" for VLAN Setup.
Unit D - Et h er n et S W == = U n it Me nu = == 0 0: 28 : 0 8 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5 H W Ve r si o n : C
[ D I SP L AY ] N - > T SA Se t ti n g D is pl a y S - > C ur r en t T S A S ta tu s L - > L CA S c h an de l et in g St a tu s A - > C ur r en t A l ar m S ta t u s P - > P er f or m an c e C - > V CG St a tu s I - > S wi t ch St a tu s Q - > U ni t B r id g e I nf o D i sp l ay [ L O G] F - > L og Of f O - > L og On U - > C ho o se a U ni t E - > R et u rn to Ma i n Me n u
[ SE T U P] T - > TS A S e tu p M - > Mo d e S et u p H - > Co n fi g S e tu p R - > Pe r fo r ma n ce Se t up /C l e ar G - > Lo o pb a ck & D ia g no st i c s S et u p D - > Sw i tc h Q o s S et u p B - > Un i t B ri d ge In f o Se t u p V - > VL A N S et u p [ MI S C ] X - > Cl e ar Un i t A la r m Hi s t or y W - > Un i t L oa d D e fa u lt
136

Press N from the Unit Menu to display T SA setting. Use arrow k eys to select T SA m ap, map1 or map2. The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*). See also below screen shows.
Unit B - Et h er n et = == Un i t T SA Se t ti ng D is p la y = = = 1 5: 53 : 0 7 0 3/ 1 5/ 2 00 5
< < AR R OW LE F T/ R IG H T: S e l ec t T S A M ap ; E n te r: A cc e pt ; E S C: Ex i t. > > S e l ec t T S A M ap : * Ma p 1
M a p2
Press ENT ER from the above m enu, then the system will show up the detail TSA current configuration.
Unit B - Et h er n et = == Un i t T SA Se t ti ng D is p la y = = = 1 5: 53 : 0 7 0 3/ 1 5/ 2 00 5
[ m a p1 ] C h a n T SA se t ti n g 0 1 TU 1 2# 0 1 V CG # 1 0 2 TU 1 2# 0 2 V CG # 1 0 3 TU 1 2# 0 3 V CG # 1 0 4 TU 1 2# 0 4 V CG # 1 0 5 TU 1 2# 0 5 V CG # 1 0 6 TU 1 2# 0 6 V CG # 1 0 7 TU 1 2# 0 7 V CG # 2 0 8 TU 1 2# 0 8 V CG # 2 0 9 TU 1 2# 0 9 V CG # 2 1 0 TU 1 2# 1 0 V CG # 2 1 1 TU 1 2# 1 1 V CG # 2 1 2 TU 1 2# 1 2 V CG # 2 1 3 TU 1 2# 1 3 V CG # 3 1 4 TU 1 2# 1 4 V CG # 3
P P. A/ D - E P P. A/ D - E P P. A/ D - E P P. A/ D - E P P. A/ D - E P P. A/ D - E E AS T A / D E AS T A / D E AS T A / D E AS T A / D E AS T A / D E AS T A / D W ES T A / D W ES T A / D
C ha n T S A s et t in g 1 5 T U1 2 #1 5 V C G# 3 1 6 T U1 2 #1 6 V C G# 3 1 7 T U1 2 #1 7 V C G# 3 1 8 T U1 2 #1 8 V C G# 3 19 . 20 . 21 . 22 . 23 . 24 . 25 . 26 . 27 . 28 .
W E ST W E ST W E ST W E ST
A/ D A/ D A/ D A/ D
C h an TS A s et t i ng 29 . 30 . 31 . 32 . 33 . 34 . 35 . 36 . 37 . 38 . 39 . 40 . 41 . 42 .
< < P re s s E SC to qu i t or o th e r k ey to ne x t pa g e >>
137

Press S from the Unit Menu to display the current TSA status. See also below screen shows.
U n i t B - Et h er n et c h a n s ta t us 0 1 E Dr o p, E/ W A d d 0 2 E Dr o p, E/ W A d d 0 3 E Dr o p, E/ W A d d 0 4 E Dr o p, E/ W A d d 0 5 E Dr o p, E/ W A d d 0 6 E Dr o p, E/ W A d d 0 7 E Dr o p, E A dd 0 8 E Dr o p, E A dd 0 9 E Dr o p, E A dd 1 0 E Dr o p, E A dd 1 1 E Dr o p, E A dd 1 2 E Dr o p, E A dd 1 3 W Dr o p, W A dd 1 4 W Dr o p, W A dd 1 5 W Dr o p, W A dd 1 6 W Dr o p, W A dd 1 7 W Dr o p, W A dd 1 8 W Dr o p, W A dd 19 . 20 . 21 . = == Cu r re n t E NE T ch a n s t at u s 22 . 23 . 24 . 25 . 26 . 27 . 28 . 29 . 30 . 31 . 32 . 33 . 34 . 35 . 36 . 37 . 38 . 39 . 40 . 41 . 42 . T SA S ta t us == = c ha n st a tu s 43 . 44 . 45 . 46 . 47 . 48 . 49 . 50 . 51 . 52 . 53 . 54 . 55 . 56 . 57 . 58 . 59 . 60 . 61 . 62 . 63 . 1 5: 53 : 5 5 0 3/ 1 5/ 2 00 5 ch an s ta t us
6.21.3 LCAS chan deleting Status

Press L from the Unit Menu to display the current deleting status for LCAS, as below screen shows.
U n i t B - Et h er n et c h a n s ta t us 01 . 02 . 03 . 04 . 05 . 06 . 07 . 08 . 09 . 10 . 11 . 12 . 13 . 14 . 15 . 16 . 17 . 18 . 19 . 20 . 21 . = = = L CA S C h an De l et in g St a tu s = = = ch a n s t at u s c ha n st a tu s 22 . 43 . 23 . 44 . 24 . 45 . 25 . 46 . 26 . 47 . 27 . 48 . 28 . 49 . 29 . 50 . 30 . 51 . 31 . 52 . 32 . 53 . 33 . 54 . 34 . 55 . 35 . 56 . 36 . 57 . 37 . 58 . 38 . 59 . 39 . 60 . 40 . 61 . 41 . 62 . 42 . 63 . 1 6: 26 : 0 0 0 3/ 2 2/ 2 00 5 ch an s ta t us
138

Press A from the Unit Menu to display the current alarm status for 63 channels. See also below screen shows. LCASSOST: "LCASSOST" is a clipped form of "LCASSO NORMST " which is VCG member at LCAS source normal state status register. LCASSOST = NO, which m eans status detected, LCASSOST = YES, which means Normal. LCASSKST: "LCASSKST" is a chipped form of "LCASSK NORMST " which is VCG member at LCAS sink idle state status register. LCASSKST = NO, which m eans status detected, LCASSKST = YES, which means Normal.
Unit D - Et h er n et = = = A l ar m S t at u s o f Ch a n ne l #1 ~ 7 = == [C h a n# 0 2] E NA NA NA NA NA NA N/ A N/ A E NA NA NA NA NA NA N/ A N/ A W NA NA NA NA NA NA W NA NA NA NA NA NA TU 1 2 -L O P: TU 1 2 -A I S: TU 1 2 -R D I: TU 1 2 -P L M: L P - BI P : L P - RE I : LC A S SO S T: LC A S SK S T: [C h a n# 0 6] TU 1 2 -L O P: TU 1 2 -A I S: TU 1 2 -R D I: TU 1 2 -P L M: L P - BI P : L P - RE I : LC A S SO S T: LC A S SK S T: E NA NA NA NA NA NA N /A N /A E NA NA NA NA NA NA N /A N /A W NA NA NA NA NA NA W NA NA NA NA NA NA [ Ch a n #0 3 ] T U1 2 - LO P : T U1 2 - AI S : T U1 2 - RD I : T U1 2 - PL M : LP - B IP : LP - R EI : L CA S S OS T : L CA S S KS T : [ Ch a n #0 7 ] T U1 2 - LO P : T U1 2 - AI S : T U1 2 - RD I : T U1 2 - PL M : LP - B IP : LP - R EI : L CA S S OS T : L CA S S KS T : E NA NA NA NA NA NA N/A N/A E NA NA NA NA NA NA N/A N/A W NA NA NA NA NA NA W NA NA NA NA NA NA 2 3: 40 : 0 2 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 [C ha n # 04 ] TU 12 - L OP : TU 12 - A IS : TU 12 - R DI : TU 12 - P LM : L P- B I P: L P- R E I: LC AS S O ST : LC AS S K ST : E NA NA NA NA NA NA N/ A N/ A W NA NA NA NA NA NA
[ C h an # 01 ] T U 1 2- L OP : T U 1 2- A IS : T U 1 2- R DI : T U 1 2- P LM : L P -B I P: L P -R E I: L C A SS O ST : L C A SS K ST : [ C h an # 05 ] T U 1 2- L OP : T U 1 2- A IS : T U 1 2- R DI : T U 1 2- P LM : L P -B I P: L P -R E I: L C A SS O ST : L C A SS K ST :
< < Pr e ss Le f t k ey to p r e vi o us , P re s s R ig ht K ey to ne x t > >
6.21.5 Performance
Press P from the Unit Menu to display perform ance report. See also below screen shows.
Unit D - Et h er n et = == UN I T P ER F OR M AN CE D is p la y = = = 2 3: 47 : 1 5 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5
139

Press 1 from the Unit Performance Display m enu to display 1-hour performance report. T here are two register types are available: (1)LINE and (2)USER. Use TAB key to switch options. See also below screen shows.
U n i t D - Et h er n et == U n i t 1 -h o ur Pe r f. Re po r t S e le c ti o n = = 2 3: 50 : 3 2 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e : U S ER Type C h a nn e l# : B I P- 2( T U 12 , TU 1 1) , BI P -8 ( TU 3) : 01
Note: BIP-2(TU12,TU11)=V5 BIP-8(TU3)=LP-B3
Press ENT ER from the above m enu to display the detail performance report.
U n i t D - Et h er n et = = = U ni t 1 - Ho u r P er f. R ep o rt == = 2 3: 52 : 3 6 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 U S E R B IP - 2( T U1 2 ,T U 11 ), B I P- 8 (T U 3) C h an n el #1 - - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 4 3 6 s ec o nd s (E S ) ( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al : 0 0 0 0 1s t N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -2n d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -3r d N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -4t h N e ar e st 15 - Mi n I n te r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - --
140

Press 2 from the Unit Performance Display m enu to display 24-hour performance report. T here are two register types are available: (1)LINE and (2)USER. Use TAB key to switch options. See also below screen shows.
U n i t D - Et h er n et == U n i t 2 4- h ou r P e rf . R ep o r t S el e ct i on == 2 3: 54 : 4 1 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e P a r am e te r Type C h a nn e l# : : : : U S ER ES B I P- 2( T U 12 , TU 1 1) , BI P -8 ( TU 3) 01
Note: BIP-2(T U12,TU11)=V5 BIP-8(TU3)=LP-B3
U n i t D - Et h er n et = = = U ni t 2 4 -H o ur Pe rf . Re p or t = = = 2 3: 55 : 0 9 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 U S E R E S BI P -2 (T U 12 ,T U 1 1) , BI P -8 ( TU 3 ) Ch an n e l# 1 - - Va l id Se c on d s i n Cu r r en t 1 5 -M i n I nt e rv al : 5 8 9 s ec o nd s - - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 0 (E S ) ( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) Cu r re n t 1 5- M in In te r v al : 0 0 0 0 Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -- - US E R, 01 - 08 09 - 16 17 - 24 25 - 32 33 - 40 41 - 48 49 - 56 57 - 64 65 - 72 73 - 80 81 - 88 89 - 96 ES , B IP - 2, L a s t 9 6 > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - > - -- - - - -- -- - -- - 1 5- M in In t er va l : - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - -
- -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - -
- -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - -
141

Press 3 from the Unit Performance Display m enu to display 7-day performance report. T here are two register types are available: (1)LINE and (2)USER. Use TAB key to switch options. See also below screen shows.
U n i t D - Et h er n et == U n i t 7 -D a ys Pe r f. Re po r t S e le c ti o n = = 2 3: 55 : 3 7 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S R e g is t er Ty p e P a r am e te r Type C h a nn e l# : U S ER : : B I P- 2( T U 12 , TU 1 1) , BI P -8 ( TU 3) : 01
Note: BIP-2(TU12,TU11)=V5 BIP-8(TU3)=LP-B3
U n i t D - Et h er n et = = = U ni t 7 - Da y s P er f. R ep o rt == = 2 3: 56 : 3 1 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 U S E R B IP - 2( T U1 2 ,T U 11 ), B I P- 8 (T U 3) C h an n el #1 - - Va l id 15 - Mi n I n te rv a l s i n C ur r en t 2 4 -H ou r In t er v al : 0 (E S ) ( UA S ) ( BE S ) (S E S) Cu r re n t 2 4- H ou r I nt e r va l : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -03 / 22 / 20 0 5 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -03 / 21 / 20 0 5 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -03 / 20 / 20 0 5 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -03 / 19 / 20 0 5 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -03 / 18 / 20 0 5 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -03 / 17 / 20 0 5 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -03 / 16 / 20 0 5 : -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - --
142
6.21.6 VCG Statistics

Press C from the Unit Menu to display VCG status. T his menu is used to display VCG statistics and active VCG channel size. See also below screen shows.
Unit D - Et h er n et S W = == VC G S t at us == = 0 0: 27 : 5 2 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
A - > V C G S ta t is ti c s B - > A c ti v e V CG C h a nn e l S iz e C - > D i ag n os t ic s D i sp l ay
6.21.6.1 VCG Statistics

Press "A" from the "VCG Status" m enu to display VCG statistics. For GFP (Generic Framing Procedure) type:
Unit C - Et h er n et = = = E N ET GF P V C G S TA TI S T IC S = = = 15 : 05 :1 9 05 / 16 / 20 0 5
R x Va l id Fr a me s : 0 00 0 0 F C S E r ro r Fr a me s : 0 00 0 0 E X I E r ro r Fr a me s : 0 00 0 0 C I D M i sm a tc h Fr a me s : 0 00 0 0 C o r re c ta b le CH E C Fr a me s : 0 00 0 0 C o r re c ta b le TH E C Fr a me s : 0 00 0 0 C o r re c ta b le EH E C Fr a me s : 0 00 0 0 R x Ma x L e ng t h V io l at io n Fr a me s : 0 00 0 0 T x Ma x L e ng t h V io l at io n Fr a me s : 0 00 0 0 R x Fi f o E rr o r Fr a me s : 0 00 0 0 T x Fi f o E rr o r Fr a me s : 0 00 0 0 T x Et h er n et B y te s : 0 00 0 0 R x Lo s tF r am e D e li n ea ti o n S t at u s: N o
T x V a li d F r am e s : 00 0 00 P TI E rr o r F r am e s : 00 0 00 U PI M is m at c h F r am e s : 00 0 00 S PA R E M i sm a tc h F r am e s : 00 0 00 U nc o r re c ta b le CH E C F r am e s : 00 0 00 U nc o r re c ta b le TH E C F r am e s : 00 0 00 U nc o r re c ta b le EH E C F r am e s : 00 0 00 R x M i n L en g th Vi o la t io n F r am e s : 00 0 00 T x M i n L en g th Vi o la t io n F r am e s : 00 0 00 R X_ E R R F r am e s : 00 0 00 T x R M II Al i gn Er r or F r am e s : 00 0 00 R x E t he r ne t B yt e s : 00 0 00 R x C l ie n t S ig n al Fa i lu re S ta t us : Ye s
< < Pr e ss SP A CE ke y t o r e fr e sh , P re s s L EF T K e y t o C le a r > >
143
For L APS (Link Access Procedure SDH) type:

Unit C - Et h er n et S W = == EN E T L AP S V C G ST A T IS T IC S = = = 1 5: 05 : 4 5 0 5/ 1 6/ 2 00 5
R x Va l id F C S E r ro r I n v al i d C on t ro l A b o rt R x Ma x L e ng t h V io l at io n T x Ma x L e ng t h V io l at io n R x Fi f o E rr o r T x Fi f o E rr o r T x Et h er n et
Fr a me s Fr a me s Fr a me s Fr a me s Fr a me s Fr a me s Fr a me s Fr a me s B y te s
: 0 00 0 0 : 0 00 0 0 : 0 00 0 0 : 0 00 0 0 : 0 00 0 0 : 0 00 0 0 : 0 00 0 0 : 0 00 0 0 : 0 00 0 0
T x V a li d I nv a l id Ad d re s s I nv a l id SA P I I nv a l id R x M i n L en g th Vi o la t io n T x M i n L en g th Vi o la t io n R X_ E R R T x R M II Al i gn Er r or R x E t he r ne t
F r am e s F r am e s F r am e s F r am e s F r am e s F r am e s F r am e s F r am e s B yt e s
: 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00
NOTE: Fifo (first in first out).
6.21.6.2 Active VCG Channel Size

Press "B" from the "VCG Status" m enu. This menu is used to display active VCG1 to VCG4 channel size.
Unit D - Et h er n et == = A c ti v e V CG S i z e = == 1 7: 28 : 3 1 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5
VCG1 VCG2 VCG3 VCG4
: : : :
Add Add Add Add
00 00 00 00
c ha n ne ls c ha n ne ls c ha n ne ls c ha n ne ls
dr o p dr o p dr o p dr o p
00 00 00 00
c ha nn e l s c ha nn e l s c ha nn e l s c ha nn e l s
144
6.21.6.3 Diagnostics Display

Press "C" from the "VCG Status" m enu. This menu is used to display Diagnostics Display
U n i t D - Et h er n et S W = == Li n e D ia g no s ti cs D is p la y = = = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT 0 0: 27 : 3 5 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
VCG# 1 2 3 4
* OF F * OF F * OF F * OF F
Lo o pb a ck L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B L OC L L B
No No No No
Te s tP a tt e rn T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n T e st P at t er n
6.21.7 Switch Status

Press I from the Unit Menu to display switch port status. The the sub-m enu will show as below. For Ethernet w ith Sw itch:
Unit D - Et h er n et S W = = = S wi t ch St at u s = = = 1 6: 2 6 :4 3 0 3 /3 1 /2 0 05
A - > S w it c h S ta ti s t ic s B - > V L AN Ta b le D i s pl a y C - > M u lt i ca s t Ta b l e D is p la y
145
Press "A" from the "Swtich Status" m enu. After selecting a desired port, press ENTER to view switch statistics, as the following screen shows. Users are allowed to select a desired port to view its switch statistics.
U n i t B - Et h er n et S W = == Sw i tc h P o rt ST AT I S TI C S = == A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S P o r t# : V CG 1 1 0 :0 2: 5 9 0 6 /2 3 /2 0 05
U n i ca s t f ra m e s en t F r a me Se n t f ai l f l o w c on t ro l s e nt N o n -u n ic a st fr a me se nt f r a me s r c v t o t al fr a me s r c v F l o w C on t ro l F r am e s Rc v M u l ti c as t f r am e s r cv B r o ad c as t f r am e r c v F r a gm e nt J a b be r f r am e s O v e rs i ze fr a me s L a t e c ol l is i on
: 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00 : 00 0 00
Fr a me s w i th le n gt h o f 6 4 Fr a me s w i th 65 < le n gt h <1 2 7 Fr a me s w i th 12 8 <l e ng t h< 2 55 Fr a me s w i th 25 6 <l e ng t h< 5 11 Fr a me s w i th 51 2 <l e ng t h< 1 02 3 Fr a me s w i th 10 2 4< l en g th < 15 22 RX A li gn m e nt er r or un d er si z e d f ra m es CR C e rr o r s Sh o rt e v e nt Co l li si o n Dr o pp ed f ra m es Fi l te ri n g C o un t er
b yt e s: 0 00 0 0 b yt e s: 0 00 0 0 b yt e s: 0 00 0 0 b yt e s: 0 00 0 0 b yt e s: 0 00 0 0 b yt e s: 0 00 0 0 : 0 00 0 0 : 0 00 0 0 : 0 00 0 0 : 0 00 0 0 : 0 00 0 0 : 0 00 0 0 : 0 00 0 0
Press "B" from the "Swtich Status" m enu to display switch VLAN table, as the following screen shows.
Unit D V l a nI D VCG1 VCG2 VCG3 VCG4 P O R T1 P O R T2 P O R T3 P O R T4 - Et h er n et S W # 00 0 1 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON #0 00 2 O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF == = S w it c h V LA N T ab l e D i sp l ay == = # 0 00 3 O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF # 00 0 4 OF F OF F OF F OF F OF F OF F OF F OF F #0 00 5 O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF # 0 00 6 O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF # 00 0 7 OF F OF F OF F OF F OF F OF F OF F OF F 1 6: 2 9 :5 6 0 3 /3 1 /2 0 05 #0 00 8 O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF O FF
: : : : : : : :
F i l te r B r o ad c as t : OF F
O FF
O FF
OF F
O FF
O FF
OF F
O FF
< < Pr e ss Le f t k ey to p r e vi o us , P re s s R ig ht K ey to ne x t > >
146
Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Press "C" from the "Swtich Status" menu to view switch IP m ulticast table, as the following screen shows. This menu is used to display which group with VlanID is joined when IGMP (Internet Group Managem ent Protocol) is enabled.
Unit D Num --01 02 - Et h er n et == = S w it c h I P M ul t ic a st T a b le Di s pl a y = == 1 6: 30 : 2 9 0 3/ 3 1/ 2 00 5 IP Ad d re ss -- - -- - -- - -- -- - 1 9 2. 1 68 . 10 0. 1 0 0 1 9 2. 1 68 . 10 0. 1 0 1 V la n ID - -- - -01 01 P or t Ma s k - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- -- - - -- - vc g 1 vc g 2
< < Pr e ss up ke y t o p re v i ou s , Pr e ss do w n Ke y to ne x t > >
Note: 512 record at most.
6.21.8 Unit Bridge Info Display

Press Q from the Unit Menu to display Bridge information. See also below screen shows. For Ethernet w ith Sw itch:
Unit D RSTP : - Et h er n et S W E na b le M A C AD D R : 0 0 :5 1 :1 d :9 5 :b 5: 8 b P r io ri t y : 3 2 76 8 C o st : 0 P o rt : 0 20 s e c He l lo Ti m e : 2 s ec 0 0 :5 1 :1 d :9 5 :b 5: 8 b 3 2 76 8 He l lo Ti m e : 2 s ec = = = U ni t B r id g e In f o D i sp l ay == = 1 7: 2 9 :1 0 0 3 /2 3 /2 0 05
1 5 s ec
B r i dg e I D M A C A DD R : B r i dg e I D P r io r it y : B r i dg e M a x A ge : 20 s e c A g i ng ti m e : 92 t i c k VCG ---1 2 3 4 R ol e - -- D sg D sg D sg D sg S ta t e - -- - Fw d Fw d Fw d Fw d C os t - -- 0 19 0 19 0 19 0 19
1 5 s ec
P r io Ed g -p - - -- -- - -128 No 128 No 128 No 128 No
P- P -- No No No No
Po r t -- - 1 2 3 4
R o le - - -Dsg Dsg Dsg Dsg
S t at e - - -- F wd F wd F wd F wd
C o st - - -019 019 019 019
P r i o e dg - p - - - - - -- - 128 No 128 No 128 No 128 No
P -P - -No No No No
NOTE: 1. Dsg (designate), Fwd (forwarding), (point to point), Alt (alternate), Lrn 2. HW Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 SW VCG 1 VCG 2 VCG 3 Prio (priority), Edg-P (edge-port), P-P (learning), Dis (disable), Blk (Block ing) Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Port 7 Port 8 VCG 4 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
147
6.21.9 TSA Setup

Press T from the Unit Menu to do TSA setup. See also below screen shows. For the details of LCAS (Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme), please see also chapter 3 in this menu.
Unit B - Et h er n et S W == = T S A S et up = == 1 4: 00 : 2 2 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
A B C D E F
-> -> -> -> -> ->
L CA S T S A E nt er ( T U1 x ) L CA S T S A E nt er ( T U3 ) L CA S C h an n el T S A D e le t e n on L CA S T S A En t e r( T U1 x ) n on L CA S T S A En t e r( T U3 ) n on L CA S C h an ne l TS A D e le t e
Note: There are two TU (Tributary Unit) types. T hey are T U3 and T U12/T U11. Do not map them both into the same TUG (TU group). Refer to the detail of Case 3 below.
Case 1 2 3
Mapping type TU1x TU1x TU3 TU3 TU1x TU3
T SA type East A/D West A/D East A/D West A/D East A/D West A/D
Chan# Chan: Chan: Chan: Chan: Chan: Chan: 1 2 1 2 1 2
Location VC1x#1 VC1x#1 VC3#1 VC3#1 VC1x#1 VC3#1
VCG# VCG1 VCG1 VCG1 VCG1 VCG1 VCG2
Remark Support Support None support
148
6.21.9.1 LCAS TSA Enter (TU1x)

Press A from the T SA Setup submenu to do LCAS (Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme) T SA setup for TU1x. See also below screen shows.
U n i t B - Et h er n et = = = L CA S T S A E nt er ( T U1 x ) = == T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct T S A m ap # : m ap 1 V CG # : 1 St a rt Ch a n# : 0 1 S t a rt TU 1 2 C ha n : 0 1 T S A T yp e : P .P .A / D (E ) [ m a p1 ] - Ea s t T U 1 2# 0 1~ 2 1: o T U 1 2# 2 2~ 4 2: o T U 1 2# 4 3~ 6 3: o [ m a p1 ] - We s t T U 1 2# 0 1~ 2 1: o T U 1 2# 2 2~ 4 2: o T U 1 2# 4 3~ 6 3: o s id e o o o o o o s id e o o o o o o C ur r en t A c ti ve M ap : m a p1 C ha n C ou n t : 0 1 [ t u g3 # 1, tu g2 # 1 , t u1 2 #1 ] 1 0: 53 : 0 9 0 4/ 2 8/ 2 00 6
6.21.9.2 LCAS TSA Enter (TU3)

Press B from the T SA Setup submenu to do LCAS TSA setup for TU3. See also below screen shows.
U n i t B - Et h er n et = = = L CA S T S A E nt er ( T U3 ) = = = T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct T S A m ap # : m ap 1 V CG # : 1 S t ar t H O C h an # : 1 C ur r en t A c ti ve M ap : m a p1 C ha n C ou n t : 1 1 0: 57 : 1 2 0 4/ 2 8/ 2 00 6
S t ar t T U 3 C ha n : 1 T S A T yp e : P .P .A / D (E ) [ m a p1 ] - Ea s t s id e T U3 c ha n ne l s a va i la b le f o r a d d: T U 3 #0 1 ~0 3 : o o o [ m a p1 ] - We s t s id e T U3 c ha n ne l s a va i la b le f o r a d d: T U 3 #0 1 ~0 3 : o o o
( H O C h an # 1, 2 ,3 = c ha nn e l #1 , 22 , 43 re s pe c ti ve l y )
149
6.21.9.3 LCAS Channel TSA Delete

Press C from the T SA Setup submenu to delete LCAS TSA channel. See also below screen shows. T his menu is used to delete assigned channels. NOTE: Only these 3 channels, Channel 1, 22, and 43, are used for TU3 in Ethernet card.
U n i t B - Et h er n et S W == = T S A D el e te (L C A S) == = T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct Ma p # S lo t # S ta r t Ch a n Co u nt of Ch a n : : : : m ap 1 B 01 01 C ur r en t A c ti ve M ap : m a p1 1 4: 02 : 2 9 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
V C G 1 c ha n s: 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 , 7 , 8 , 9 , 10 ,1 1 , 12 , 13 , 14 , 15 , 16 , 17 ,1 8 , 19 , 20 , 21 V C G 3 c ha n s: 22 , 23 , 24 ,2 5 , 26 , 27 , 28 , 29 v c g 1( L CA S ) v cg 3 (L CA S )
Note: W hen delete LCAS channel in one ethernet card, another card should be deleted at the same time. W hen removing display on the LCAS chan deleting status screen, the user cannot do mapping untill removing disappear exactly from the screen.
150
6.21.9.4 nonLCAS TSA Enter (TU1x)

Press "D" from the "T SA Setup" subm enu to do nonLCAS T SA enters for T U1x. See also below screen shows.
U n i t B - Et h er n et = == no n LC A S T SA En te r ( TU 1 x) == = T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct T S A m ap # : m ap 1 V CG # : 1 St a rt Ch a n# : 0 1 S t a rt TU 1 2 C ha n : 0 1 T S A T yp e : P .P .A / D (E ) [ m a p1 ] - Ea s t T U 1 2# 0 1~ 2 1: o T U 1 2# 2 2~ 4 2: o T U 1 2# 4 3~ 6 3: o [ m a p1 ] - We s t T U 1 2# 0 1~ 2 1: o T U 1 2# 2 2~ 4 2: o T U 1 2# 4 3~ 6 3: o s id e o o o o o o s id e o o o o o o C ur r en t A c ti ve M ap : m a p1 C ha n C ou n t : 0 1 [ t u g3 # 1, tu g2 # 1 , t u1 2 #1 ] 1 1: 00 : 3 2 0 4/ 2 8/ 2 00 6
6.21.9.5 nonLCAS TSA Enter (TU3)

Press "E" from the "T SA Setup" subm enu to do nonLCAS TSA enters for TU3. See also below screen shows.
U n i t B - Et h er n et == = n o nL C AS TS A E nt e r (T U 3) == = T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct T S A m ap # : m ap 1 V CG # : 1 S t ar t H O C h an # : 1 C ur r en t A c ti ve M ap : m a p1 C ha n C ou n t : 1 1 1: 22 : 0 7 0 4/ 2 8/ 2 00 6
S t ar t T U 3 C ha n : 1 T S A T yp e : P .P .A / D (E ) [ m a p1 ] - Ea s t s id e T U3 c ha n ne l s a va i la b le f o r a d d: T U 3 #0 1 ~0 3 : o o o [ m a p1 ] - We s t s id e T U3 c ha n ne l s a va i la b le f o r a d d: T U 3 #0 1 ~0 3 : o o o
( H O C h an # 1, 2 ,3 = c ha nn e l #1 , 22 , 43 re s pe c ti ve l y )
151
6.21.9.6 nonLCAS Channel TSA Delete

Press F from the T SA Setup submenu to delete nonLCAS T SA channel. See also below screen shows. T his menu is used to delete assigned channels. NOTE: Only these 3 channels, Channel 1, 22, and 43, are used for TU3 in Ethernet card.
U n i t B - Et h er n et S W == = T S A D el e te = = = T A B o r E n te r k e y t o se l e ct Ma p # S lo t # S ta r t Ch a n Co u nt of Ch a n : : : : m ap 1 B 01 01 C ur r en t A c ti ve M ap : m a p1 1 4: 0 2: 2 9 09 / 2 0/ 2 00 5
V C G 1 c ha n s: 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 , 7 , 8 , 9 , 10 ,1 1 , 12 , 13 , 14 , 15 , 16 , 17 ,1 8 , 19 , 20 , 21 V C G 3 c ha n s: 22 , 23 , 24 ,2 5 , 26 , 27 , 28 , 29 v c g 1( L CA S ) v cg 3 (L CA S )
6.21.10
Mode Setup
Press M from the Unit Menu to do model setup. T he system supports two models for determ ing and controlling how a pack et gets assigned to a VLAN: (1) e-line for fixed port priority VLAN and (2) e-lan for tag-based VLAN. T herefore, two m odes are available for selected: "e-line" or "e-lan". Use ENT ER k ey to switch the selections. See also below screen shows. For Ethernet w ith Sw tich:
U n i t B - Et h er n et S W = == Mo d e Se t u p = == A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT 1 5: 5 9 :3 7 0 3 /1 5 /2 0 05
M o d e S el e ct i on : e -l in e
Note: Do not enable RSTP in e-line mode.
152
6.21.11
Config Setup
Press H from the Unit Menu to do VCG (Virtual Concatenation Group) encapsulation setup. See also below sub-menu shows.
Unit C -EthernetSW === VCG Config Setup === 14:54:32 04/09/2008
A B C I E F G
-> -> -> -> -> -> ->
VCG Encapsulation Type Setup VCG Encapsulation Par Setup VCG Differential Delay Compensation Setup Customer Information Setup Link Config Setup Linkdown Mask Setup Shortened IPG Setup
<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>
6.21.11.1 VCG Encapsulation Type Setup

Press A from the "VCG Congig Setup" menu to select a desired type, LAPS or GFP. T he current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*). See also below screen shows. After done the type selection, press ESC to return the "VCG Congig Setup" m enu.
For GFP (Generic Framing Procedure) type:

U n i t D - Et h er n et = == En c ap s ul a ti o n Ty p e S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT 1 7: 19 : 3 1 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5
E n c ap s ul a ti o n T yp e V C G #1 V C G #2 V C G #3 V C G #4 : : : : G FP G FP G FP G FP
153
For L APS (Link Access Procedure SDH) type:

U n i t D - Et h er n et = == En c ap s ul a ti o n Ty p e S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT 1 7: 33 : 1 8 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5
E n c ap s ul a ti o n T yp e V C G #1 V C G #2 V C G #3 V C G #4 : : : : L AP S L AP S L AP S L AP S
6.21.11.2 VCG Encapsulation Par Setup

Under "VCG Congig Setup" m enu, press "B" to do VCG Encapsulation Par Setup. This menu is used to set up Encapsulation Par setting for GFP frame format.
U n i t D - Et h er n et = == En c ap s ul a ti o n Pa r Se t up == = 1 7: 22 : 0 1 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: 0~ 7, B AC K SP A CE to ed i t VCG# : 1 G F P P a ra m et e r S et u p : r x PT I : 0 t x PT I : 0 r x EX I : 0 t x EX I : 0 r x UP I : 1 t x UP I : 1 r x CI D : 0 t x CI D : 0 r x SP A RE : 0 t x SP A RE : 0 C o m pa r e m as k f o r P TI : 0 C o m pa r e m as k f o r E XI : 0 D e l ta : 1 t x PF I : 0 r x pa y lo a d d es c ra m in g : En a bl e t x pa y lo a d s cr a mi n g : En a bl e r x FC S e r ro r p a ss : Di s ab l e t x FC S e r ro r i n se r t : Di s ab l e r x co r e h ea d er de s cr am b l e: En a bl e t x co r e h ea d er sc r am bl e : En a bl e c H E C b it co r re c ti o n : En a bl e c H E C e rr o r i ns e rt : Di s ab l e t H E C b it co r re c ti o n : En a bl e t H E C e rr o r i ns e rt : Di s ab l e e H E C b it co r re c ti o n : En a bl e e H E C e rr o r i ns e rt : Di s ab l e U P I c h ec k : En a bl e U P I m i sm a tc h p a ss : Di s ab l e C I D c h ec k : En a bl e C I D m i sm a tc h p a ss : Di s ab l e S P A RE ch e ck : Di s ab l e S P A RE mi s ma t ch pa s s : Di s ab l e r x ex t en d h e ad e r m od e : Di s ab l e t x ex t en d h e ad e r m od e : Di s ab l e C S F f r am e i n se r t : Di s ab l e < < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o us me nu > >
NOTE: Tx(transmit), rx (receive), cHEC (core header error correction), tHEC (type header error correction), eHEC (extend header error correction).
154
Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Below m enu is used to set up Encapsulation Par setting for LAPS frame format.
U n i t B - Et h er n et S W = == En c ap s ul a ti o n Pa r Se t up == = 1 0: 07 : 1 5 0 6/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: 0~ 0x F F , B AC K SP A CE to ed it VCG# : 1 L A P S P ar a me t er Se t up : rx rx rx rx rx rx rx rx ad d re s s co n tr o l sa p i m sb sa p i l sb de s cr a mi n g FC S e r ro r p a ss ab o rt fr a me pa s s st a rt / en d f l ag ch k : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 4_ 3 FE 1 En a bl e Di s ab l e Di s ab l e En a bl e En a bl e En a bl e En a bl e 0x 7 D Di s ab l e 0 tx tx tx tx a dd re s s c on tr o l s ap i m s b s ap i l s b : : : : : : : : 4 3 FE 1 E na bl e D is ab l e D is ab l e E na bl e
t x s cr am i n g t x F CS e r r or in s er t a bo r t fr a m e i ns e rt t x s ta rt / e nd fl a g g en
r x ad d re s s c he c k r x co n tr o l c he c k r x sa p i c he c k t x ab o rt fr a me fo r ma t h e a de r m i sm a tc h p a ss ifg
NOTE: ifg (inter frame gap), sapi (service access point indentifier).
6.21.11.3 VCG Differential Delay Compensation Setup

Under "VCG Congig Setup" m enu, press "C" to set up differential delay compensation range for VCG#1 to VCG#4.
U n i t D - Et h er n et == = Di f fe r nt i al De l ay C o m pe n sa t io n = = = 1 7: 22 : 3 8 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT
D i f fe r en t ia l D e la y C om p e ns a ti o n R an g e: V C G #1 V C G #2 V C G #3 V C G #4 : : : : 2 55 m s 2 55 m s 2 55 m s 2 55 m s
155

Under "VCG Congig Setup" m enu, press "I" to do Customer Information Setup. See also below screen shows.
U n i t D - Et h er n et = = = C us t om e r I nf o rm at i o n S et u p = == A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , B A CK S PA C E t o e di t, E SC to ab o rt 1 6: 36 : 0 5 0 9/ 2 0/ 2 00 5
P o rt # 01 02 03 04
C us t om e r I nf or m a ti o n Et h er n et Et h er n et Et h er n et Et h er n et
6.21.11.5
Link Config Setup
Press E from the "VCG Congig Setup" menu to select a link configuration, 10 half, 10 full, 100 half,100 full and Auto negotiation. After done the type selection, press ESC to return the "VCG Congig Setup" menu.
U n i t B - Et h er n et S W = == Li n k C on f ig S e t up == = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT 1 3: 28 : 4 5 0 5/ 2 4/ 2 00 7
port 01 02 03 04
l in k A ut o A ut o A ut o A ut o
c o nf ig n e go ti a t io n n e go ti a t io n n e go ti a t io n n e go ti a t io n
156
6.21.11.6
Linkdown Mask Setup
Press F from the "VCG Config Setup" menu. This menu is used to enable or disable alarm and relay, and also for setting alarm severity. Move the cursor at the desired location, and use TAB key to edit. After done the type selection, press ESC to return the "VCG Congig Setup" menu.
U n i t B - Et h er n et S W = = = L in k do w n M as k S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT 1 3: 29 : 1 8 0 5/ 2 4/ 2 00 7
port 01 02 03 04
a la r m E NA B LE D E NA B LE D E NA B LE D E NA B LE D
r e l ay D I S AB L ED D I S AB L ED D I S AB L ED D I S AB L ED
s e ve r it y M A JR M A JR M A JR M A JR
6.21.11.7 Shortened IPG Setup

Press G from the "VCG Config Setup" menu. The Shortened IPG Setup screen will appear. Key in a Shortened Inter-Packet-Gap setting. Press the ESC key to returnto the "VCG Congig Setup" menu.
Unit C -EthernetSW === Shortened IPG Setup === 14:55:26 04/09/2008
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: 1~31, BACKSPACE to edit
Shortened Inter-Packet-Gap: 11
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >
Note: This will set the shortened IPG (inter-packet gap) for all ports of Ethernet-over-SFH mapper.
157
6.21.12
Performance Setup/ Clear
Press R from the Unit Menu to do performance setup or clear performance. See also below screen shows.
Unit D - Et h er n et = = = U N IT PE R FO R MA N CE S e t up / Cl e ar == = 2 3: 59 : 3 0 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5
6.21.12.1 Unit Clear Performance Data

Press "C" from the "UNIT PERFORMANCE Setup/Clear" m enu to clear performance data, then press "Y" to clear data or "N" to abort.
Unit D - Et h er n et = = = U N IT PE R FO R MA N CE S e t up / Cl e ar == = 2 3: 59 : 3 0 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5
> > Cl e ar pe r fo r ma n ce d a t a - a r e y ou su r e ? [ Y /N ]
158
6.21.12.2 Unit Performance Threshold Setup

Press "D" from the "UNIT PERFORMANCE Setup/Clear" m enu to set up performance threshold.
U n i t D - Et h er n et = == U NI T P e rf o rm a nc e T hr e s ho l d S et u p = == 0 0: 06 : 1 4 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S M o n it o r P oi n t B IP En / Di s EN s ev e ri t y I NF O Th r es h ol d 24 0 0
6.21.13
RMII Diagnostic Setup
Press "G" from the "Unit Menu" to set up RMII (Reduced Media Independent Interface) diagnostics. Then the sub-m enu will show up as below.
Unit D - Et h er n et == = R M II Di a gn o st ic S et u p = == 1 7: 23 : 2 8 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5
A - > R M II Lo o pb ac k Te s t B - > R M II Te s t pa t t er n S e tu p
159
6.21.13.1 RMII Loopback Test

Press "A" from the "RMII Diagnostic Setup" to do RMII loopback test. Use arrow k eys to m ove the cursor and ENT ER key to select a desired option: OFF, LOC (local loopback ), or LLB (line loopback). The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
U n i t D - Et h er n et = == RM I I L oo p ba ck T es t = = = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT 1 7: 24 : 3 6 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5
V C G #1 V C G #2 V C G #3 V C G #4
: : : :
* OF F * OF F * OF F * OF F
L OC L OC L OC L OC
L LB L LB L LB L LB
6.21.13.2 RMII Test pattern Setup

Press "B" from the "RMII Diagnostic Setup" to set up RMII test pattern.
U n i t D - Et h er n et == = R M II Te s t pa t t er n S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT VCG# : 1 1 7: 2 4: 5 2 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5
D i r ec t io n
: ST M -1 s i d e OFF * 2^ 1 5- 1
S YN C 0 1
160
6.21.14
Switch Qos Setup
Press "D" from the "Unit Menu" to set up quality of service. Then the sub-m enu will show as below. For Ethernet w ith Sw itch:
Unit D - Et h er n et == = Q o s S et up = == 0 0: 11 : 3 3 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5
A B C D E F G H I J
-> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> ->
P r io r it y M od e Se t up T x /D r op Pr io r i ty ( Fi x ed ) Se t up T x /D r op Pr io r i ty ( Vl a n t ag ) Se t up T x /D r op Pr io r i ty ( TO S f i el d )S e tu p T x /D r op Pr io r i ty ( TC P /U D P p or t )S et u p D S EF Se t up D i st r us t ed P o r t S et u p C o ng e st i on C o n tr o l f un c ti o n S et up F l ow Co n tr ol S et u p R a te Co n tr ol S et u p
6.21.14.1 Priority Mode Setup

Press "A" from the "Qos Setup" menu to set up priority mode. Two priority modes are available: (1) Vlan-Tag and (2) Fixed. Each ingress port can be programmed to use one of the following options to map the incoming packets to the internal priorities: 1. Using fixed priority defined on a per-port basis 2. Using the priority defined in the VLAN tag 3. Using bits [7:5] or [4:2] of the IP header TOS field 4. Using TCP/UDP port configuration This menu also allowes users to select "YES" to over VLAN tag by TOS (IP type of service) for all ports, or "NO" to disable.
U n i t D - Et h er n et = = = I n te r na l P r io r it y M o de Se t up == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S PORT VCG1 VCG2 VCG3 VCG4 P O R T1 P O R T2 P O R T3 P O R T4 P r io r it y M od e : : : : : : : : Vl a n_ T ag Vl a n_ T ag Vl a n_ T ag Vl a n_ T ag Vl a n_ T ag Vl a n_ T ag Vl a n_ T ag Vl a n_ T ag 0 0: 12 : 3 1 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5
T O S o v er Vl a n T ag : NO
161
Priority Classification Rule
Use TOS No Yes IP Frame? No Yes Use logical port? Yes Use logical port
Fix port priority? Yes
No
TOS Precedence over VLAN?
No
VLAN Tag? Yes Use VLAN priority
No
IP Frame?
No
Use default port settings
Use default port settings
6.21.14.2 Tx/ Drop Priority (Fixed) Setup

Press "B" from the "Qos Setup" menu to set up fixed priority mode for Tx type and Drop type. In this fixed priority mode, the priority is associated with the ingress port and not with the priority defined by the incoming packet. It means that the packets will receive an internal transmit priority and drop priority, defined for the ingress port. Data of the packet is not changed. That is the data coming is the data going out. For Tx type: Two options of priority are available for transmit type: (1) P0 for best effort (lowest priority) and (2) P1 for class 1 (highest priority).
U n i t D - Et h er n et = = = F ix e d P ri o ri ty S et u p = == A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S TY P E# :T x PORT P r io r it y VCG1 VCG2 VCG3 VCG4 P O R T1 P O R T2 P O R T3 P O R T4 : : : : : : : : P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 0 0: 13 : 2 7 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5
162
Chapter 6 Terminal Operation For Drop type: Two options of priority are available for drop type: (1) low-drop and (2) high-drop.
U n i t D - Et h er n et = = = F ix e d P ri o ri ty S et u p = == A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S TY P E# :D r op PORT P r io r it y VCG1 VCG2 VCG3 VCG4 P O R T1 P O R T2 P O R T3 P O R T4 : : : : : : : : lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op 0 0: 15 : 2 4 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5
6.21.14.3 Tx/ Drop Priority (Vlan tag) Setup

Press "C" from the "Qos Setup" menu to set up VLAN tag priority mode for Tx type and Drop type. For Tx type:
U n i t D - Et h er n et = == Vl a n T ag Pr i or it y Se t up == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S TY P E# :T x V l a n T ag P ri o ri t y P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 0 0: 16 : 5 4 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5
163
For Drop type:

U n i t D - Et h er n et = == Vl a n T ag Pr i or it y Se t up == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S TY P E# :D r op V l a n T ag P ri o ri t y P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op 0 0: 18 : 0 7 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5
6.21.14.4 Tx/ Drop Priority (TOS field) Setup

Press "D" from the "Qos Setup" menu to set up TOS field priority mode for Tx type and Drop type. For Tx type:
U n i t D - Et h er n et = == TO S P r io r it y S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S TY P E# :T x TOS P ri o ri t y P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 P0 0 0: 19 : 1 3 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5
T O S F i el d : [4 : 2]
164
For Drop type:

U n i t D - Et h er n et = == TO S P r io r it y S e tu p = = = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S TY P E# :D r op TOS P ri o ri t y P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty P r i or i ty 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op lo w -d r op 0 0: 20 : 1 3 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5
T O S F i el d : [4 : 2]
6.21.14.5 Tx/ Drop Priority (TCP/UDP port) Setup

Press "E" from the "Qos Setup" menu to set up TCP/UDP port priority mode. Then the sub-menu will show up as below.
Unit D - Et h er n et T C P/ U DP Po r t p ri or i t y S et u p 0 0: 21 : 1 8 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5
A - > T C P/ U DP We ll K no w n P or t P r io r it y S e tu p B - > T C P/ U DP Us er D ef i ne Po r t P ri o ri ty S et u p C - > T C P/ U DP Po rt R an g e P ri o ri t y S et up
165
Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Press "A" from the "TCP/UDP Port priority Setup" menu to do TCP/ UDP well know port priority setup. Well-know port number Service 23 512 6000 443 111 22555 22 554 Telnet TCP/ UDP XWIN HTTP SUN rpc IP phone call setup SSH RTSP
U n i t D - Et h er n et == = T C P W EL L K n ow n p o rt P r i or i ty Se t up == 0 0: 21 : 4 0 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S T c p /U d p P or t 23 51 2 60 0 0 44 3 11 1 22 5 55 22 55 4 Po r t En a b le D IS AB L E D IS AB L E D IS AB L E D IS AB L E D IS AB L E D IS AB L E D IS AB L E D IS AB L E P ri o ri t y( Tx ) Pr i or i ty ( Dr o p) P0 l ow - dr o p P0 l ow - dr o p P0 l ow - dr o p P0 l ow - dr o p P0 l ow - dr o p P0 l ow - dr o p P0 l ow - dr o p P0 l ow - dr o p D is c a rd D IS A B LE D IS A B LE D IS A B LE D IS A B LE D IS A B LE D IS A B LE D IS A B LE D IS A B LE
Press "B" from the "TCP/UDP Port priority Setup" menu to do TCP/ UDP user define port priority setup.
U n i t D - Et h er n et = = = T C P u se r p o rt Pr io r i ty Se t up == = 0 0: 22 : 4 2 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: 1~ 65 5 3 5, BA C KS P AC E t o e di t T c p /U d p P or t 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 Po r t En a b le D I S AB L E D I S AB L E D I S AB L E D I S AB L E D I S AB L E D I S AB L E D I S AB L E D I S AB L E P ri o ri t y( Tx ) Pr i or i ty ( Dr o p) P0 l ow - dr o p P0 l ow - dr o p P0 l ow - dr o p P0 l ow - dr o p P0 l ow - dr o p P0 l ow - dr o p P0 l ow - dr o p P0 l ow - dr o p D is c a rd D IS A B LE D IS A B LE D IS A B LE D IS A B LE D IS A B LE D IS A B LE D IS A B LE D IS A B LE
N O T E: P0 = B es t e f fo rt
166
Press "C" from the "TCP/UDP Port priority Setup" menu to do TCP/ UDP port range priority setup. The user defined range provides a range of logical port number with the same priority level. Three options are available for Filtering item: (1) NO for no filtering. (2) Inclusive for inclusive filtering. Packets of these ports (Min. port number < these ports < Max. port number) will be filtered. (3) Exclusive for exclusive filtering. Packets of these ports (these ports < Min. port number and these ports > Max. port number) will be filtered.
U n i t D - Et h er n et = == TC P R a ng e P r io ri t y S e tu p = = = 0 0: 24 : 1 4 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: 1~ 65 5 3 5, BA C KS P AC E t o e di t
P o r t N um ( Mi n ): 0 00 0 0 P o r t N um ( Ma x ): 0 00 0 0 T x P r io r it y : P 0 D r o p P ri o ri t y: l ow - dr op F i l te r in g :NO
6.21.14.6 DSEF Setup

Press "F" from the "Qos Setup" menu to do DSEF setup. This menu is used to disable or enable DSEF (Differentiated Service Expedited Forwarding) function for all ports. DSEF is used to assure that packets are transmitted from ingress to egress ports with very low latency.
U n i t D - Et h er n et == = D S EF Se tu p == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S 0 0: 26 : 0 5 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5
D S E F : Di s ab l e
167
6.21.14.7 Distrusted Port Setup

Press "G" from the "Qos Setup" menu to set up distrusted port. This menu allows users to select a desired port (VCG1 to VCG4, Port1 to Port4), to do distrusted setup (YES or NO), and to set up tag priority (0 to 7). If a previous stage in the network is sending traffic with an inappropriate VLAN tag priority or with a rate higher than the bandwidth allocated for the traffic priority, the port receiving the data may be considered distrusted port. When a port is considered distrusted the VLAN tag priority field is replaced for a predefined value. The out going packet carries the new VLAN tag priority. A port can only be considered distrusted if it is in Tag based VLAN mode.
U n i t D - Et h er n et == = D i st r us t ed S e t up == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S P o r t# : V CG 1 D i s tr u st e d T a g p r io r it y : NO :7 0 0: 30 : 1 2 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5
6.21.14.8 Congestion Control functioin Setup

Press "H" from the "Qos Setup" menu to set up congestion control function. Then the following sub-menu will show up.
Unit D - Et h er n et U ni c as t C o ng e st i on C o n tr o l S et u p 0 0: 33 : 3 0 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5
A - > Q u eu e (P 0 )C on g e st i on Co n tr o l S et up B - > Q u eu e (P 1 )W RE D th r es h ol d S e tu p C - > Q u eu e (P 1 )W RE D Dr o p R at e S e tu p
168
Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Press "A" from the "Unicast Congestion Control Setup" menu to do UCC setup. NOTE: When the destination po queue size reaches this threshold, the best effort packets will be dropped at B%.
U n i t B - Et h er n et S W = == P0 Th r es h ol d S e tu p = = = 1 0: 10 : 4 1 0 6/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: 0~ 16 , BA C KS P AC E t o e d it
P 0 th r es h ol d ( X 6 . 25 %) : 12 B% ( X 6 . 25 %) : 12 P 0 th r es h ol d : Wh e n de s t in a ti o n P 0 q ue u e si z e r e ac h es th i s t hr es h o ld , th e b es t ef f or t p k ts wi l l be d ro p pe d a t B % .
Press "B" from the "Unicast Congestion Control Setup" menu to do WRED (Weighted Random Early Drop) threshold setup. For level 1, when destination P1 queue size reaches Level1 threshold, the P1 high-drop packets will be dropped at X%, the P1 low-drop packets will be dropped at Y%. For level 2, when destination P1 queue size reaches Level2 threshold, the P1 high-drop packets will be dropped at 100%, the P1 low-drop packets will be dropped at Z%.
WRED Logic Behaviour Px > WRED_L1 High Drop Low Drop X% Y% Px > WRED_L2 100% Z%
U n i t B - Et h er n et S W = == P1 Qu e ue th r es ho l d S e tu p = = = 1 0: 13 : 5 7 0 6/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: 0~ 16 , BA C KS P AC E t o e d it P o r t# : V CG 1 L e v el 1 (X 6. 2 5% ) : 12 L e v el 2 (X 6. 2 5% ) : 14 L e v el 1 : W h en de s ti na t i on P1 qu e ue si z e re a c he s L e ve l 1 t hr e sh ol d , t h e P 1 h ig h- d r op pk t s w il l b e d ro p p ed at X% , t h e P 1 l ow -d r o p p kt s w i ll be dr op p e d a t Y %. L e v el 2 : W h en de s ti na t i on P1 qu e ue si z e re a c he s L e ve l 2 t hr e sh ol d , t h e P 1 h ig h- d r op pk t s w il l b e d ro p p ed at 10 0 %, t h e P 1 l ow -d r o p p kt s w i ll be dr op p e d a t Z %.
169
Press "C" from the "Unicast Congestion Control Setup" menu to do WRED drop rate setup.
U n i t B - Et h er n et S W = = = W RE D D r op Ra te S et u p = == 1 0: 14 : 2 8 0 6/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: 0~ 15 , BA C KS P AC E t o e d it
X% ( X 6. 2 5% ) : 12 Y% ( X 6. 2 5% ) : 00 Z% ( X 6. 2 5% ) : 00 L e v el 1 : W h en de s ti na t i on P1 qu e ue si z e re a c he s L e ve l 1 t hr e sh ol d , t h e P 1 h ig h- d r op pk t s w il l b e d ro p p ed at X% , t h e P 1 l ow -d r o p p kt s w i ll be dr op p e d a t Y %. L e v el 2 : W h en de s ti na t i on P1 qu e ue si z e re a c he s L e ve l 2 t hr e sh ol d , t h e P 1 h ig h- d r op pk t s w il l b e d ro p p ed at 10 0 %, t h e P 1 l ow -d r o p p kt s w i ll be dr op p e d a t Z %.
6.21.14.9 Flow Control Setup

Press "I" from the "Qos Setup" menu to enable or disable flow control and asymmetric flow control. See also below screen.
U n i t D - Et h er n et = == F lo w C o nt r ol S e t up == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S P o r t# : V CG 1 F l o w C on t ro l : ON A s y mm e tr i c F lo w C o nt ro l : O FF 0 0: 37 : 2 2 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5
170
6.21.14.10
Unit D - Et h er n et
Rate Control Setup

= = = S wi t ch Ra t e c on tr o l S e tu p = = = 0 0: 38 : 0 5 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5
Press "J" from the "Qos Setup" menu to do rate control setup. Then the sub-menu will show as below.
A B C D
- > Un i ca s t R at e C o nt r ol En a bl e /D i sa bl e - > Un i ca s t R at e C o nt r ol Se t up - > WR E D S et u p fo r Un i ca s t R at e C o nt ro l - > Mu l ti c as t /B ro a d ca s t R at e C o nt r ol S e t up
Press "A" from the "Switch Rate Control Setup" menu to enable or disable egress and ingress rate control.
U n i t D - Et h er n et = = = T x/ R x R at e E n ab le / D is a bl e = == A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S 0 0: 54 : 0 3 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5
E g r es s R at e C o nt r ol : D I SA B LE I n g re s s R at e C o nt r ol : D I SA B LE
171
Press "B" from the "Switch Rate Control Setup" menu to set up egress and ingress Bit rate.
U n i t D - Et h er n et = = = P e r P or t R a te Co nt r o l S et u p = == 0 0: 54 : 5 7 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: 0~ 10 0 0 00 , B A CK S PA C E t o ed i t P o r t# : V CG 1
E g r es s B it R at e (K b ps ) I n g re s s B it R at e (K b ps )
: 1 0 00 0 0 : 1 0 00 0 0
Press "C" from the "Switch Rate Control Setup" menu to set up WRED drop rate. The actions on the incoming traffic depending on the flow control state of that port. If the ingress port flow control is turned on, the XOFF flow control will be triggered when the credit is running lower than half of the maximum burst size. The XON will be triggered when the available credit is increased to above the threshold. If the port flow control is disabled, the received traffic will subject to WRED depending on the credit availability. If the none of the credit is available, all received frame will be dropped. If only a quarter of maximum burst credits are available, the frame that been marked as high drop will be drop 100%, the low drop frame will be dropped at ra%. If half of the maximum burst credits are available, high drop frame will be dropped at rb%.
U n i t D - Et h er n et = = = W RE D D r op Ra te S et u p = == 0 0: 55 : 4 4 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: 0~ 15 , BA C KS P AC E t o e d it
R a % (G r an u la r it y 6 . 25 %) : 00 R b % (G r an u la r it y 6 . 25 %) : 00
172
Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Press "D" from the "Switch Rate Control Setup" menu to do broadcast and multicast rate setup. This broadcast and multicast rate defines for port N (N = port number), the number of packets allowed to be forwarded within a specified time. Once the packet rate is reached, packets will be dropped. Data Rate = The number of packets/ Time Base
U n i t D - Et h er n et == = Br o ad c as t /M u lt i ca st R at e S e tu p = = = 0 0: 56 : 3 1 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S P o r t# : V CG 1
T i m e B as e : 12 8 00 u s T h e n u mb e r o f M ul t ic as t pa c ke t s: un l im i t T h e n u mb e r o f B ro a dc as t pa c ke t s: un l im i t
6.21.15
Unit Bridge Info Setup
Press "B" from the "Unit Menu" to do Bridge information setup.

U n i t D - Et h er n et == = U n it Br i dg e I nf o Se t up == = 1 7: 26 : 3 5 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: 0~ 9, B AC K SP A CE to ed i t R S T P : E n ab l e D e s ig n at e d R oo t D e s ig n at e d R oo t D e s ig n at e d R oo t D e s ig n at e d R oo t R o o t M ax Ag e : M A C AD D R : 0 0 :5 1 :1 d :9 5 :b 5: 8 b P r io ri t y : 3 2 76 8 C o st : 0 P o rt : 0 20 s e c He l lo Ti m e : 2 s ec 0 0 :5 1 :1 d :9 5 :b 5: 8 b 3 2 76 8 He l lo Ti m e : 0 02 s ec
1 5 s ec
B r i dg e I D M A C A DD R : B r i dg e I D P r io r it y : B r i dg e M a x A ge : 0 20 s e c A g i ng ti m e : 0 92 t i c k VCG ---1 2 3 4 R ol e - -- D sg D sg D sg D sg S ta t e - -- - Fw d Fw d Fw d Fw d C os t - -- 0 19 0 19 0 19 0 19
Fo r wa r d D el ay : 0 1 5 s ec
P r io Ed g -p - - -- -- - -128 No 128 No 128 No 128 No
P- P -- No No No No
Po r t -- - 1 2 3 4
R o le - - -Dsg Dsg Dsg Dsg
S t at e - - -- F wd F wd F wd F wd
C o st - - -019 019 019 019
P r i o e dg - p - - - - - -- - 128 No 128 No 128 No 128 No
P -P - -No No No No
NOTE: 1. Dsg (designate), Fwd (forwarding), (point to point), Alt (alternate), Lrn 2. HW Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 SW VCG 1 VCG 2 VCG 3 Prio (priority), Edg-P (edge-port), P-P (learning), Dis (disable), Blk (Block ing) Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Port 7 Port 8 VCG 4 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
173
6.21.16
VLAN Setup
Press "V" from the "Unit Menu" to do VLAN setup. Note that VLAN setting is not available for e-line m ode. Before setting VLAN, m ake sure the s ystem is in e-lan mode. For Ethernet with Switch:
Unit B - Et h er n et S W == = V L AN Se tu p == = 1 0: 16 : 2 8 0 6/ 2 3/ 2 00 5
W ar n in g !! ! V L AN on l y w or k in g i n e - la n m o de
Press ESC from the above m enu. Press "M" from the "Unit Menu" to select e-lan mode.
U n i t B - Et h er n et S W == = M o de Se tu p == = A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT 1 0: 16 : 4 8 0 6/ 2 3/ 2 00 5
M o d e S el e ct i on : e -l an
> > Ch a ng e c o nf i gu r at io n (Y / N) ? ( N ot e :t o s av e , pl e as e u s e V -c o mm an d )
174
Chapter 6 Terminal Operation After done the mode selection, press "V" from the "Unit Menu" to do VLAN setup. Then the s ystem will show up the "VLAN Setup" subm enu.
Unit B - Et h er n et S W == = V L AN Se tu p == = 1 0: 17 : 3 8 0 6/ 2 3/ 2 00 5
A B C D
-> -> -> ->
V L AN V L AN V L AN G V RP
Ty p e Co d e Co n fi gu r a ti o n Ta b le Se t up
6.21.16.1 VLAN Type Code

Press "A" from the "VLAN Setup" sub-menu to do VLAN type code setting. Two VLAN types are available: (1) 0 x 8100 and (2) 0 x 88A8.
Q-in-Q Tagged Ethernet Frame
175
U n i t D - Et h er n et = = = V LA N T y pe Co de S et u p = == A R R OW KE Y S : C U RS O R MO V E , EN T ER KE Y : IT EM S EL E CT
0 0: 59 : 5 5 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5
V L A N T yp e C o de : 0 x8 10 0
6.21.16.2
VLAN Configuration
Press "B" from the "VLAN Setup" sub-menu to do VLAN port configuration, including setting PVID (port VLAN ID), enable or disable these items: (1) port ingress filter, (2) port force untag out, (3) port filter untag frame, and (4) port filter tag frame.
U n i t B - Et h er n et = == S w i tc h V L AN Po r t C on fi g u ra t io n S e tu p = 1 0: 18 : 4 8 0 6/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: 1~ 40 9 5 , B AC K SP A CE to ed it P o r t# : V CG 1
Port Port Port Port Port
P VI D I ng r es s _F i lt e r F or c e_ u nt a g_ o ut F il t er un T ag Fr am e F il t er Ta g F r am e
: : : : :
0 00 1 D is a bl e E na b le D is a bl e D is a bl e
PVID is the default VLAN tag. If the received pack et is untagged, then the pack et is classified with the default VLAN tag. W hen the Ingress_Filter is disabled, VLAN packets not belonging to the source port are forwarded if the destination port belongs to the VLAN. W hen the Ingress_Filter is enabled, packets with VLAN not belonging to the source port are filtered. W hen Force_untag_out is enabled, all pack ets transmitted from this port are untagged.
176
6.21.16.3
Switch VLAN Table Setup

0 1: 01 : 5 6 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5
Press "C" from the "VLAN Setup" sub-menu to do set up VLAN table.
U n i t D - Et h er n et = == Sw i tc h V L AN Ta bl e Se t up == = A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , T A B/ ` : R OL L U P /D OW N OP T IO N S VID# : 0 00 1 VCG1 VCG2 VCG3 VCG4 P O R T1 P O R T2 P O R T3 P O R T4 :ON :ON :ON :ON :ON :ON :ON :ON
F i l te r B r o ad c as t : O FF
The screen above shows a sample VLAN port association table. A port set to ON in this screen is a member of the VLAN. If a packet with a VLAN ID tag comes in, it will be sent to the member ports of that VLAN ID. For example, if a packet with a tag of VLAN ID#3 comes in, it will be sent to the m ember ports of VLAN#3 (the ports which are set toON in the VLAN3 port association table.)
6.21.16.4
GVRP Setup
Press "D" from the "VLAN Setup" sub-menu to do GVRP setup.

U n i t D - Et h er n et == = G V RP Se tu p == = 0 1: 03 : 0 9 0 3/ 2 4/ 2 00 5 A R R OW KE Y S: CU R SO R M OV E , P l ea s e I np u t: 1~ 40 9 5 , B AC K SP A CE to ed it P o r t# : V CG 1 GVRP P O R T G VR P J o i n T im e L e a ve Ti m e L e a ve a ll Ti m e :D is a b le :D is a b le :0 02 0 :0 06 0 :1 00 0
177
6.21.17
Press X from the Unit Menu to clear alarm history, then press Y or N to confirm it. See also below screen shows.
Unit D - Et h er n et == = U n it Me nu = == 2 3: 37 : 1 9 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 H W Ve r si o n : C
[ SE T U P] T - > TS A S e tu p M - > Mo d e S et u p H - > VC G C o nf i g S et u p R - > Pe r fo r ma n ce Se t up /C l e ar G - > RM I I D ia g no s ti c S et u p D - > Sw i tc h Q o s S et u p B - > Un i t B ri d ge In f o Se t u p V - > VL A N S et u p [ MI S C ] X - > Cl e ar Un i t A la r m Hi s t or y W - > Un i t L oa d D e fa u lt
B - a r e y ou s u r e ? [ Y /N ]
6.21.18
Unit Load Default
Press W from the Unit Menu to load default, then press Y or N to confirm it. See also below screen shows.
Unit D - Et h er n et == = U n it Me nu = == 2 3: 37 : 1 9 0 3/ 2 3/ 2 00 5 H W Ve r si o n : C
[ SE T U P] T - > TS A S e tu p M - > Mo d e S et u p H - > VC G C o nf i g S et u p R - > Pe r fo r ma n ce Se t up /C l e ar G - > RM I I D ia g no s ti c S et u p D - > Sw i tc h Q o s S et u p B - > Un i t B ri d ge In f o Se t u p V - > VL A N S et u p [ MI S C ] X - > Cl e ar Un i t A la r m Hi s t or y W - > Un i t L oa d D e fa u lt
178
Chapter 7 Appendix A IP Phone and Proxy Server
7 APPENDIX A IP PHONE AND SIP PROXY SERVER

The IP Phone and SIP Proxy Server are O9100 accessories which allow IP phone service as engineering order-wire on the O-9100 STM1 Ring. Figure 7-1, below, illustrates such an application.
Figure 7- 1 O9100 STM1 Ring
7.1 SIP Proxy Server

Note: If you order SIP Proxy Server Basic Software from Loop Telecom you must provide a MAC address so that a license key can be generated to operate the software at that address. 7.1.1 Generic Setup Procedure
There are several proxy server programs available on the market. The generic setup procedure is as follows:
1. Install the SIP Proxy Server software on your PC. 2. Follow all setup instructions that come with the software to put the SIP Proxy Server in service statues.
209
Chapter 7 Appendix A IP Phone and Proxy Server The software we used to prepare this appendix is ININ SIP Proxy Server V3.0.006. Step by step installation instructions for this software are described in section 7.1.2 below.
7.1.2
Specific Setup Example -- Using ININ SIP Proxy Server
SIP Proxy is an easy to install and easy to use proxy server. The SIP Proxy Server download web page is located at: http://www.inin.com/sipproxy/. Download the software onto Windows-based PC. The software can be run on Windows 2000,XP platform. ININ SIP Proxy Server provides customers with a free trial version to try out. Customer may purchase the license either from ININ or from LOOP Telecom.
Before downloading the SIP Proxy Server Software, it is necessary to download the SIP Proxy Server License File. After downloading the SIP Proxy Server software, the customer can begin to setup the SIP Proxy Server. The trial license file can be download from http://www.inin.com/sipproxy/, the user can save it on the desktop when downloading the trial license file.
The setup procedure is as follows:
After downloading, you must unzip the file. When the file is opened, you will see the Setup execution file. Double click the Setup, the SIP Proxy Server InstallShield Wizard will starts to guide.
After double clicking the Setup file, the following screen will appear. Press the Next > button.
210
The License File screen will appear. Specify the SIP Proxy Server License file and then press the Next > button.
The Destination Folder screen will appear. The default folder is C:\Program Files \ Interaction SIP Proxy \ . If you want to changethe folder location, click the Change button and select the folder where you wish to locate the SIP Proxy Server, otherwise press the Next > button.
211
The Service Port Number screen will appear. Enter 5060 in the field and then press the Next > button.
The Ready to Install the Program screen will appear. Press the Install button.
212
The Installing Interaction SIP Proxy 3.0.006 screen will appear.
Then the InstallShield Wizard Completed screen appear. Press the Finish button.
213
When the installation is finished the following will appear.
After installation, the user will be able to see an Interaction SIP Proxy shortcut icon on the desktop. Double click it to start the SIP Proxy Server Service.
214
The Interaction SIP Proxy screen will appear. The screen configures the Interaction SIP Proxy address at http://10.3.11.3:5060/ . (The IP address will be the host IP address)
Open the Internet Explorer Browser and type the address in the address field. The user can then connect to the Interaction SIP Proxy Server Web page.
215
Click on Config selection on the right top of the web page. The user can configure the setup value of the SIP Proxy Server. Such as Domain name, Port number, etc.
SIP Proxy Server setup is completed.
7.2 IP Phone
7.2.1 Generic Setup There are several IP Phones available on the market. The generic setup procedure is as follows: 1. Follow all setup instructions that come with the IP Phone. The IP Phone we used to prepare this appendix is IP Phone. Step by step installation instructions for this IP Phone follow in section 7.2.2 below.
216
7.2.2 Specific Setup Example-- Using IP Phone
Figure 7-2, below, illustrates the IP Phone.
Figure 7-2 IP Phone
Connection Setup
Step 1: Please take our your IP Phone and its handset. Then connect your handset to IP phone by plugging the left jack of handset. Please connect the network cable from O9100 to WAN port of your IP phone. Step 2: Please plug in your power adaptor to your IP phone and power source. LCD of your IP phone will display Starting-----. and then Hi xxx menu within approximately 3 seconds.
IP Address setup Registering (150)
217
Press <Menu/OK>, then will display
>1.View 2.Configure
Select 2. Configure and then press <Menu/OK>, enter 135 for password.(Every single IP Phone has the same password.)
>2.Configure Password = 135
Press <Menu/OK>, then will display >1.Network 2.SIP 3.(NO)DND On 4.Forward Mode 5.Voice Msg Num
Select 1. Network and then press <Menu/OK>, it will display: >1.(No)Dynamic IP 2.(No)PPPoE 3.Static IP 4.Time Zone
Select 3. Static IP and then press <Menu/OK>, it will display: >1.IP Address 2.Network Mask 3.Default Route
218
4.DNS Server
Select 1. IP Address and then press <Menu/OK>, enter 10.3.11.50 for IP Address. As following display:
IP Address = 10.3.11.50_
Back to the following screen and select 2.SIP. 1.Network >2.SIP 3.(NO)DND On 4.Forward Mode 5.Voice Msg Num
Press <Menu/OK>, then will display >1.Phone Number 2.Password 3.Auth.ID
Select 1. Phone Number and then press <Menu/OK>, it will display: Phone number = 150 150 is default value; user can change if user wish to use different phone number.
Proxy Setup Press Cancel to return to the main menu.
219
>1.View 2.Configure
Select 3. Advanced. Press <Menu/OK> again. >3.Advanced
Key in your password. (Default password is 1230.) Press <Menu/OK> again. >3.Advanced Pass =
Select 3. SIP Advanced. Press <Menu/OK> again. >3.SIP Advanced
Select 1.(No)Proxy On and then press<Menu/OK>, it will display:
>1.(Yes)Proxy On 2.Proxy Addr 3.Proxy Port
Select 2.Proxy Addr and then press<Menu/OK>, enter 10.3.11.3 for Proxy Address. As the following screen: Proxy Addr =
220
10.3.11.3_
Select 3.Proxy Port and then press<Menu/OK>, enter 5060 for Proxy Port. As the following screen: Proxy Port = 5060_
Restart Press Cancel to return to the main menu. >1.View 2.Configure
Select 1.View from the following screen and press <Menu/OK>. >1.View 2.Configure
The following screen will display. Selection 3.Restart and then press <Menu/OK>.
1.Network Value 2.Ping >3.Restart 4.Image Version 5.(No)PKT Trace
The following screen will display.
Starting--------
221
The Setup of IP address will be activated after Restart process.
222
Chapter 8 Appendix B Glossary
8 APPENDIX B ACRONYMS
BPDU cHEC CID DHCP DSEF eHEC EXI GARP GFP GID GIP GVRP HEC IGMP LAPS LCAS MSP P3M3 PDU PFI PLI PTI PVID RS-Ack RTSP SNCP STP tHEC TCP/UDP TOS TSA UPI VC VID WRED Bridge Protocol Data Unit Core HEC Channel ID Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Differentiated Service Expedited Forwarding Extension HEC Extension Header Identifier Generic Attribute Registration Protocol Generic Framing Procedure GARP Information Declaration GARP Information Propagation Generic VLAN Attribute Registration Protocol Header Error Control Internet Group Management Protocol Link Access Procedure SDH Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme Multiplex Section Protection 3-channel plesiochronous level 3 mapper Protocol Data Unit Payload FCS Indicator PDU Length Indicator Payload Type Identifier Port VLAN ID Re-sequence Acknowledge Bit Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Sub Network Connection Protection Spanning-Tree Protocol Type HEC Transmission Control Protocol/ User Datagrame Protocol IP type of service Time Slot Assignment User Payload Identifier Virtual Concatenation VLAN ID Weighted Random Early Drop
222
Chapter 9 Management over Loop SDH Products
9 APPENDIX C MANAGEMENT OVER LOOP SDH PRODUCTS
9.1 Overview of Management Network Types

Management over Loop SDH products is built on the IP/Ethernet protocol stacks. With built-in ethernet bridging and IP routing capabiities for management packets, Loop SDH products canbe easily interconnected with any L2 Ethernet switch and/or router to form a management network. This appendix describes three types of networking available for management over the Loop-O9100, namely: Pure Layer-2 Switching Network; Separate IP Subnet using External Router; and Separate IP Subnet using a Built-in Router (GNE).
9.1.1
Terminology
NE: For the purpose of this appendix, a Network Element is a Loop SDH device.
BNE: A Bridge Network Element is an NE with a built-in Ethernet Bridging function for management packets. The Ethernet Packets will be bridged or switched depending on the Ethernet Mac address. By default, all Loop SDH products are BNE in terms of management traffic. In order to prevent packet loops and to support full tolerance over fiber cuts, the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) per IEEE 802.1d and the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) per IEEE 802.1w are both supported.
GNE: A GNE is a BNE with a built-in IP routing function. With the routing function enabled on the LAN interface of the Loop Device, the GNE is capable of separating the Loop SDH management IP network from other IP networks. This approach is used to either create a clear segmentation of IP networks or to reduce the amount of broadcast packets within a big IP subnet.
223
9.2 Pure Layer-2 Switching Network

In this pure Layer-2 switching management network, all the devices are working as Bridge NE (BNE) in terms of management packets. The NMS and devices/NEs are within the same IP subnet. They are collocated within the same broadcast domain. It is a simple and straight forward management network configuration if the number of NEs is small.
NMS or TELNET VT-100
Ethernet
LOOP - ADM
LAN
TCP/UDP connection
LOOP - ADM
DCC communication channel for management packet

Loop ADM
0 1 0 1
0 1
0 1
BNE
BNE
0 1
0 1
SDH ring
BNE
LOOP - ADM LOOP - ADM

0 1 0 1
BNE BNE
LOOP - ADM
BNE
0 1
0 1
BNE
Local Device Management
0 1
0 1
LAN
West-side DCC channel
East-side DCC channel
A Layer-2 Ethernet Packet Switching fabric
Local LAN
Figure 9- 1 Pure Layer-2 Ethernet Switching Network Pros: A simple Ethernet Network Cons: The broadcast packet is fed into the SDH device network. If the network is large, this will cause lower response performance from the NEs.
224
9.3 Separate IP Subnet using External Router

In this type of management network, all the devices/NEs are working as Bridge NEs (BNEs), but the NMS and the devices/NEs are separated by an external router. The NMS IP subnet is different from the NE IP subnet. The default Gateway of all BNEs shall be set to the Router sitting between the NMS and the BNEs.
Ethernet
Router
SNMP LAN
LOOP - ADM
0 1 0 1
NMS or TELNET vt100
BNE
Loop ADM
0 1 0 1
BNE
LOOP - ADM
0 BNE 1 0 1
SDH ring
LOOP - ADM
0 1 0 1
BNE BNE
LOOP - ADM
0 1 0 1
BNE 1 0
LOOP - ADM
0 1
SNMP LAN
Figure 9- 2 Separate IP Subnet using External Router
Pros: A larger number of NEs can be supported and managed on the ring Cons: An extra router will be required. An IP subnet must be planned for the NEs.
225
9.4
Separate IP Subnet using Built-in Router (GNE)
In this type of management network, all the devices are working as Bridge NEs (BNEs) except the head-end NE (GNE). In addition to the built-in Bridging function, the GNE has a routing engine supporting Dynamic Routing (RIP-I/II) and static routing on the LAN Port interface. With the built-in Routing function, the user can save an extra router when they want to separate the IP subnets. The default Gateway of all BNEs shall be set to the GNE.
SNMP LAN
IP routing engine
West-side DCC channel
A Layer-2 Ethernet Packet Switching fabric
East-side DCC channel Ethernet
Local Device Management
GNE
0 1 0 1
SNMP LAN
LOOP - ADM
NMS or TELNET VT-100
GNE
LOOP - ADM
1 BNE 0 0 1
Loop ADM
0 1 0 1
BNE
SDH ring
LOOP - ADM
0 1 0 1
BNE BNE
LOOP - ADM
0 1 0 1
BNE 0 1
LOOP - ADM
0 1
SNMP LAN
Figure 9- 3 Separate IP Subnet using Built-in Router (GNE)
Pros: All-in-one routing and bridging function for management traffic. Cons: An IP subnet must be planned for the NEs.
226
Chapter 10 MIB ALARM TRAP INFORMATION
10 APPENDIX: MIB ALARM TRAP INFORMATION

The following alarm trap information is excerpted from the Mib file (version V2.04.05 04/11/2006----compatible with firmware version V2.04.05) for this device. It is being included here for the benefit of users who need this information when integrating the Loop-O9100 device into their system. --==================================--- trap MIB loopO9100LocalTrap TRAP-TYPE ENTERPRISE loop-O9100 VARIABLES {ccAlarmHistoryString, ccAlarmHistoryNum, ccAlarmHistorySide, ccAlarmHistoryUnit, ccAlarmHistoryPort, ccAlarmHistorySeverity, ccAlarmHistoryClr, ccAlarmHistoryType, ccAlarmHistoryModel } DESCRIPTION "Local alarm trap" ::= 3 --==================================-ccAlarmHistoryString OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE (0..255)) ACCESS read-only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION "Alarm History String" ::= { alarmHistoryEntry 2 }
--==================================-ccAlarmHistoryNum OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER ACCESS read-only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION "Alarm Number" ::= { alarmHistoryEntry 3 } --==================================-ccAlarmHistorySide OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER { east(1), west(2)
227
Chapter 10 MIB ALARM TRAP INFORMATION } ACCESS read-only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION "East side or West side" ::= { alarmHistoryEntry 4 } --==================================-ccAlarmHistoryUnit OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX SlotID ACCESS read-only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION "Unit A/B/C/D" ::= { alarmHistoryEntry 5 }
SlotID ::= INTEGER { unit-A(1), unit-B(2), unit-C(3), unit-D(4) --==================================-ccAlarmHistoryPort OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX E1T1PortID ACCESS read-only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION "Port number(1..28)" ::= { alarmHistoryEntry 6 } E1T1PortID ::= INTEGER { port-1(1), port-2(2), port-3(3), port-4(4), port-5(5), port-6(6), port-7(7), port-8(8), port-9(9), port-10(10), port-11(11), port-12(12), port-13(13), port-14(14), port-15(15), port-16(16), port-17(17),
228
Chapter 10 MIB ALARM TRAP INFORMATION port-18(18), port-19(19), port-20(20), port-21(21), port-22(22), port-23(23), port-24(24), port-25(25), port-26(26), port-27(27), port-28(28) } --==================================-ccAlarmHistorySeverity OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX Severity ACCESS read-only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION "Alarm Severity" ::= { alarmHistoryEntry 7 }
Severity ::= INTEGER { critical(1), major(2), minor(3), information(4) } --==================================--
ccAlarmHistoryClr OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX NoYes ACCESS read-only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION "Alarm Clear" ::= { alarmHistoryEntry 8 NoYes ::= INTEGER { no(1), yes(2), not-available(3) }
--==================================-ccAlarmHistoryType OBJECT-TYPE
229
Chapter 10 MIB ALARM TRAP INFORMATION SYNTAX AlarmType ACCESS read-only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION "Alarm Type" ::= { alarmHistoryEntry 9 }
AlarmType ::= INTEGER { optical-module-eqp(1), optical-module-uneqp(2), stm1-los(3), stm1-lof(4), stm1-ms-ais(5), stm1-ms-rdi(6), stm1-signal-fail(7), stm1-signal-degrade(8), au4-lop(9), au4-ais(10), vc4-rdi(11), vc4-plm(12), vc4-lom(13), tug3-lop(14), tug3-ais(15), tug3-rdi(16), tug3-plm(17), e1-t1-eqp(18), e1-t1-uneqp(19), e1-t1-los(20), e3-t3-eqp(21), e3-t3-uneqp(22), e3-t3-los(23), e3-t3-ais(24), ethernet-eqp(25), ethernet-uneqp(26), tu1x-lop(28), tu1x-ais(29), tu1x-rdi(30), tu1x-plm(31), alarm-cut-off(32), overheat(33), power-loss(34), fan-fail(35), device-create-error(37), timing-source-sync-loss(38), sncp-protection-switch(39), msp-protection-switch(40), external-alarm(41), card-type-mismatch(42), j0-trace-mismatch(43), j1-trace-mismatch(44), j2-trace-mismatch(45),
230
Chapter 10 MIB ALARM TRAP INFORMATION b1-tca-alarm(46), b2-tca-alarm(47), b3-tca-alarm(48), v5-tca-alarm(49), line-cv-tca-alarm(50), lp-b3-tca-alarm(51), b1-uas-alarm(52), b2-uas-alarm(53), b3-uas-alarm(54), v5-uas-alarm(55), line-cv-uas-alarm(56), lp-b3-uas-alarm(57) }
--==================================-ccAlarmHistoryModel OBJECT-TYPE SYNTAX INTEGER { empty(0), e1(1), t1(2), e3(3), t3(4), ethernet-switch(5), ethernet(6), unknown(9) } ACCESS read-only STATUS mandatory DESCRIPTION "Alarm Unit Model" ::= { alarmHistoryEntry 10 }
231

O9100 V28 M

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

O9100 V28 M

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Loop-O9100 ADM/TM Users Manual

2008 Loop Telecommunication International, Inc. All rights reserved.

Chapter 1 Product Description

Chapter 1 Product Description

Figure 1- 1 GSM Application Illustration

Chapter 1 Product Description

Access Total Solution

SDH Backbone DDN Internet

E3/T3 E1/T1 Ethernet

O9100 STM1 ADM NMS

O9100 STM1 ADM

E3/T3 E1/T1 Ethernet

O9100 STM1 ADM

Two Linear STM-1 with MSP (1+1) protection

O9100 STM1 ADM

O9100 STM1 ADM 0 1 E1/ T1 E1/ T1 E3/ DS3 V4200-9

E1/ T1 IP6440 IP6610

H3900 HDSL PC LAN PBX

Figure 1- 2 Access Application Illustration

Chapter 1 Product Description

Figure 1- 3 Smart Building Application Illustration

Chapter 1 Product Description

Figure 1- 4 POTS Switch Application Illustration

Chapter 1 Product Description

Dual Homing Application

O9100 with CO (Ring Closure)

O9100 with CO (Ring Closure)

O9100 with CO (Ring Closure)

O9100 with CO (Ring Closure)

are fiber broken

are equipment broken

Figure 1- 5 Dual Homing Application Illustration

Chapter 1 Product Description

1.3 Loop-O9100 Topology and Protection Types

E1/T1 E3/T3 Ethernet

E1/T1 E3/T3 Ethernet

E1/T1 E3/T3 Ethernet

E1/T1 E3/T3 Ethernet

E1/T1 E3/T3 Ethernet

Chapter 1 Product Description

Linear Topology With MSP 1+1 Protection

Working Section/ Line

Working Section/ Line

Working Section/ Line

Working Section/ Line

E1/T1 E3/T3 Ethernet

E1/T1 E3/T3 Ethernet

E1/T1 E3/T3 Ethernet

E1/T1 E3/T3 Ethernet

E1/T1 E3/T3 Ethernet

MSP 1+1 Protection Scheme

Chapter 1 Product Description fiber bundles.

E1 or DS3 Input A B Node A

STM-1 SNCP/UPSR Protection Architecture

STM-1 Ring without Path Protection

63E1 POTS SW4

Chapter 1 Product Description

Chapter 1 Product Description

E1/T1 E3/T3 Ethernet

E1/T1 E3/T3 Ethernet

Loop SDH STM-1 Ring with Double Protection

E1/T1 E3/T3 Ethernet